Skip to main content

Full text of "Service Manual: Pioneer PDP 5010FD"

See other formats


sound, vision, sou! 


Service 


Manual 

PDP-501 OFD 


ORDER NO. 

ARP3455 


PLASMA DISPLAY SYSTEM 

PDP-501 OFD 


THIS MANUAL IS APPLICABLE TO THE FOLLOWING MODEL(S) AND TYPE(S). 


Model 

Type 

Power Requirement 

Remarks 

PDP-5010FD 

KUCXC 

AC 120 V 


PDP-5010FD 

KUC 

AC 120 V 




PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1 , Meguro 1 -chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan 
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. Box 1760, Long Beach, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. 

PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, 9120 Melsele, Belgium 

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 

©PIONEER CORPORATION 2007 


T-IZS-001 JULY 2007 Printed in Japan 


1 


2 


3 


4 


SAFETY INFORMATION 



This service manual is intended for qualified service technicians ; it is not meant for the casual 
do-it-yourselfer. Qualified technicians have the necessary test equipment and tools, and have been 
trained to properly and safely repair complex products such as those covered by this manual. 

1 Improperly performed repairs can adversely affect the safety and reliability of the product and may 
void the warranty. If you are not qualified to perform the repair of this product properly and safely, 
you should not risk trying to do so and refer the repair to a qualified service technician. 

WARNING 

B This product contains lead in solder and certain electrical parts contain chemicals which are known to the state of California to 
cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. 

Health & Safety Code Section 25249.6 - Proposition 65 

NOTICE 

(FOR CANADIAN MODEL ONLY) 

* Fuse symbols - B I I (fast operating fuse) and/or B I (slow operating fuse) on PCB indicate that replacement parts must 
be of identical designation. 

REMARQUE 

(POUR MODELE CANADIEN SEULEMENT) 

Les symboles de fusible B | | (fusible de type rapide) et/ou ■ | | (fusible de type lent) sur CCI indiquent que les pieces 

c de remplacement doivent avoir la meme designation. 


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 

NOTICE : Comply with all cautions and safety related notes 
located on or inside the cabinet and on the chassis. 

The following precautions should be observed : 

1 . When service is required, even though the PDP UNIT an 
isolation transformer should be inserted between the power line 
and the set in safety before any service is performed. 

2. When replacing a chassis in the set, all the protective devices 
must be put back in place, such as barriers, nonmetallic knobs, 
adjustment and compartment covershields, isolation resistor- 
capacitor, etc. 

3. When service is required, observe the original lead dress. Extra 
precaution should be taken to assure correct lead dress in the 
high voltage circuitry area. 

4. Always use the manufacture's replacement components. 
Especially critical components as indicated on the circuit 
diagram should not be replaced by other manufacture's. 
Furthermore where a short circuit has occurred, replace those 
components that indicate evidence of overheating. 

5. Before returning a serviced set to the customer, the service 
technician must thoroughly test the unit to be certain that it is 
completely safe to operate without danger of electrical shock, 
and be sure that no protective device built into the set by the 
manufacture has become defective, or inadvertently defeated 
during servicing. Therefore, the following checks should be 
performed for the continued protection of the customer and 
servicetechnician. 


6. Perform the following precautions against unwanted radiation 
and rise in internal temperature. 

• Always return the internal wiring to the original styling. 

• Attach parts (Gascket, Ferrite Core, Ground, Rear Cover, 
Shield Case etc.) surely after disassembly. 

7. Perform the following precautions for the PDP panel. 

• When the front case is removed, make sure nothing hits the 
panel face, panel corner, and panel edge (so that the glass does 
not break). 

• Make sure that the panel vent does not break. (Check that the 
cover is attached.) 

• Handle the FPC connected to the panel carefully. 

Twisting or pulling the FPC when connecting it to the 
connector will cause it to peel off from the panel. 

8. Pay attention to the following. 

• Pay extreme caution when the front case and rear panel are 
removed because this may cause a high risk of disturbance to 
TVs and radios in the surrounding. 


PDP-5010FD 


2 


1 


2 


3 


4 





5 


6 


7 


8 


Leakage Current Cold Check 

With the AC plug removed from an AC power source, place a 
jumper across the two plug prongs. Turn the AC power switch on. 
Using an insulation tester (DC 500V), connect one lead to the 
jumpered AC plug and touch the other lead to each exposed metal 
part (input/output terminals, screwheads, metal overlays, control 
shafts, etc.), particularly any exposed metal part having a return 
path to the chassis. Exposed metal parts having a return path to 
the chassis should have a minimum resistor reading of 4 Mfl 
The below 4 MD resistor value indicate an abnormality which 
require corrective action. Exposed metal parts not having a return 
path to the chassis will indicate an open circuit. 

Leakage Current Hot Check 

Plug the AC line cord directly into an AC power source (do not 
use an isolation transformer for this check). 

Turn the AC power switch on. 

Using a” Leakage Current Tester (Simp son Model 22 9 
equivalent)", measure for current from all exposed metal parts of 
the cabinet (input/output terminals, screwheads, metal overlays, 
control shaft, etc.), particularly any exposed metal part having a 
return path to the chassis, to a known earth ground (water pipe, 
conduit, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 1 mA. 



plug as required) 

AC Leakage Test 

ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITH IN THE LIMITS 
OUTLINED ABOVE ARE INDICATIVE OF A POTENTIAL 
SHOCK HAZARD AND MUST BE CORRECTED BEFORE 
RETURNING THE SET TO THE CUSTOMER. 


PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE 

Many electrical and mechanical parts in PIONEER set have 
special safety related characteristics. These are often not evident 
from visual inspection nor the protection afforded by them 
necessarily can be obtained by using replacement components 
rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which | 
have these special safety characteristics are identified in this 
Service Manual. 

Electrical components having such features are identified by 
marking with a A on the schematics and on the parts list in this 
Service Manual. 

The use of a substitute replacement component which dose not B 
have the same safety characteristics as the PIONEER 
recommended replacement one, shown in the parts list in this 
Service Manual, may create shock, fire or other hazards. 

Product Safety is continuously under review and new instructions 
are issued from time to time. For the latest information, always 
consult the current PIONEER Service Manual. A subscription to, | 
or additional copies of, PIONEER Service Manual may be 
obtained at a nominal charge from PIONEER. 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


A 


B 


C 


[Important Check Points for Good Servicing] 

In this manual, procedures that must be performed during repairs are marked with the below symbol. 

Please be sure to confirm and follow these procedures. 

""1. Product safety 

□ Please conform to product regulations (such as safety and radiation regulations), and maintain a safe servicing environment by 
following the safety instructions described in this manual. 

© Use specified parts for repair. 

Use genuine parts. Be sure to use important parts for safety. 

@ Do not perform modifications without proper instructions. 

Please follow the specified safety methods when modification(addition/change of parts) is required due to interferences such as 
radio/TV interference and foreign noise. 

© Make sure the soldering of repaired locations is properly performed. 

When you solder while repairing, please be sure that there are no cold solder and other debris. 

Soldering should be finished with the proper quantity. (Refer to the example) 

© Make sure the screws are tightly fastened. 

Please be sure that all screws are fastened, and that there are no loose screws. 

© Make sure each connectors are correctly inserted. 

Please be sure that all connectors are inserted, and that there are no imperfect insertion. 

© Make sure the wiring cables are set to their original state. 

Please replace the wiring and cables to the original state after repairs. 

In addition, be sure that there are no pinched wires, etc. 

© Make sure screws and soldering scraps do not remain inside the product. 

Please check that neither solder debris nor screws remain inside the product. 

© There should be no semi-broken wires, scratches, melting, etc. on the coating of the power cord. 

Damaged power cords may lead to fire accidents, so please be sure that there are no damages. 

If you find a damaged power cord, please exchange it with a suitable one. 

© There should be no spark traces or similar marks on the power plug. 

When spark traces or similar marks are found on the power supply plug, please check the connection and advise on secure 
connections and suitable usage. Please exchange the power cord if necessary. 

® Safe environment should be secured during servicing. 

When you perform repairs, please pay attention to static electricity, furniture, household articles, etc. in order to prevent injuries. 
Please pay attention to your surroundings and repair safely. 


2. Adjustments 



To keep the original performance of the products, optimum adjustments and confirmation of characteristics within specification. 
Adjustments should be performed in accordance with the procedures/instructions described in this manual. 


3. Lubricants, Glues, and Replacement parts 

Use grease and adhesives that are equal to the specified substance. 
Make sure the proper amount is applied. 



4. Cleaning 



For parts that require cleaning, such as optical pickups, tape deck heads, lenses and mirrors used in projection monitors, proper 
cleaning should be performed to restore their performances. 


F 


5. Shipping mode and Shipping screws 



To protect products from damages or failures during transit, the shipping mode should be set or the shipping screws should be 
installed before shipment. Please be sure to follow this method especially if it is specified in this manual. 


PDP-5010FD 


4 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


CONTENTS 

SAFETY INFORMATION 2 

1. SERVICE PRECAUTIONS 7 

1.1 NOTES ON SOLDERING 7 

1 .2 CHARGED SECTION AND HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING POINT 8 

2. SPECIFICATIONS 9 

2.1 ACCESSORIES 9 

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 10 

2.3 PANEL FACILITIES 11 

3. BASIC ITEMS FOR SERVICE 14 

3.1 CHECK POINTS AFTER SERVICING 14 

3.2 QUICK REFERENCE 15 

3.3 PCB LOCATION 17 

3.4 JIGS LIST 18 

3.5 CLEANING 18 

4. BLOCK DIAGRAM 20 

4.1 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2) 20 

4.2 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2) 22 

4.3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) 24 

4.4 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) 26 

4.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 28 

4.6 50FX DRIVE ASSY 29 

4.7 50F Y DRIVE, 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS 30 

4.8 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of 50F X, Y DRIVE and 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS 31 

4.9 50F ADDRESS L and S ASSYS 32 

4.10 50F DIGITAL ASSY 33 

4.11 MAIN ASSY (DTV BLOCK DIAGRAM) 34 

4.12 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of MAIN ASSY 36 

4.13 TANSHI ASSY 38 

4.14 50FHD LED and FHD IR ASSYS 39 

4.15 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of FHD RLS and SIDE KEY ASSYS 40 

5. DIAGNOSIS 41 

5.1 POWER SUPPLY OPERATION 41 

5.1 .1 LED DISPLAY INFORMATION 41 

5.1 .2 POWER ON SEQUENCE 42 

5.1 .3 DETAILS OF POWER ON SEQUENCE 43 

5.2 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART OF FAILURE ANALYSIS 45 

5.2.1 WHOLE UNIT 45 

5.2.2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 47 

5.2.3 DRIVE ASSY 48 

5.2.4 DIGITAL ASSY 52 

5.2.5 MAIN ASSY 53 

5.2.6 VIDEO SYSTEM 54 

5.2.7 AUDIO SYSTEM 60 

5.3 DIAGNOSIS OF PD (POWER-DOWN) 63 

5.3.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER-DOWN SIGNAL 63 

5.3.2 PD (POWER-DOWN) DIAGNOSIS OF FAILURE ANALYSIS 64 

5.4 DIAGNOSIS OF SD (SHUTDOWN) 67 

5.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE SHUTDOWN SIGNAL 67 

5.4.2 SD (SHUTDOWN) DIAGNOSIS 68 

5.5 NON-FAILURE INFORMATION 70 

5.5.1 INFORMATION ON SYMPTOMS THAT DO NOT CONSTITUTE FAILURE 70 

5.5.2 FUNCTION OF DECREASING THE BRIGHTNESS LEVEL 73 

5.6 OUTLINE OF THE OPERATION 74 

5.6.1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF FUNCTION 74 

5.6.2 SPECIFICATION OF THE FAN CONTROL 75 

5.6.3 PROCESSING IN ABNORMALITY 76 

5.6.4 TRAP SWITCH 79 


A 


B 


C 


D 


F 


PDP-501 0FD 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


6. SERVICE FACTORY MODE 80 

6.1 OUTLINE OF THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE 80 

A 6.1.1 SERVICE FACTORY MODE TRANSITION CHART 80 

6.1.2 HOW TO ENTER/EXIT SERVICE FACTORY MODE 80 

6.1.3 FUNCTIONS WHEN ENTERING THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE 81 

6.1.4 REMOTE CONTROL CODE IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE 82 

6.1.5 PDP SERVICE REMOTE CONTROL 83 

6.1.6 FACTORY HIERARCHICAL TABLE 84 

| 6.1.7 INDICATIONS IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE 86 

6.2 DETAILS OF FACTORY MENU 88 

6.2.1 INFORMATION 88 

6.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+) 98 

6.2.3 OPTION 108 

6.2.4 INITIALIZE 109 

b 7. DISASSEMBLY 112 

7.1 FLOWCHART OF REMOVAL ORDER FOR THE MAIN PARTS AND BOARDS 112 

7.2 DISASSEMBLY 113 

7.3 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM 121 

8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT 122 

8.1 ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED WHEN THE UNIT IS REPAIRED OR REPLACED 122 

■ 8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY) 124 

8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA 127 

8.4 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL ASSY IS REPLACED 128 

8.5 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED 1 41 

8.6 PRECAUTION ON REPLACEMENT OF THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT 144 

9. RS-232C 145 

c 9.1 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND 145 

9.1.1 PREPARED TOOLS 145 

9.1.2 USING RS-232C COMMANDS 145 

9.2 LIST OF RS-232C COMMANDS 146 

9.3 DETAILS OF EACH COMMANDS 155 

9.3.1 QS1 (PANEL STATUS) 155 

1 9.3.2 QS2 (PANEL OPERATION DATA) 156 

9.3.3 QS3 (OTHER DATA ON THE PANEL) 157 

9.3.4 QAJ (PANEL ADJUSTMENT DATA) 158 

9.3.5 QPW (VIDEO ADJUSTMENT DATA OF THE PANEL) 159 

9.3.6 QPM (PULSE METER VALUE) 159 

D 9.3.7 QPD (PD LOGS) 160 

9.3.8 QSD (SD LOGS) 161 

9.3.9 QSE (DESTINATION PECULIAR INFORMATION) 162 

9.3.10 QMT (TEMPERATURE / FAN ROTATION / ROOM LIGHT SENSOR) 162 

9.3.11 QNG (SHUTDOWN INFORMATION OF MTB) 163 

9.3.12 QSI (INPUT SIGNAL DATA) 165 

| 9.3.13 DRV (PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF) 165 

9.3.14 FAY / FAN (ADJ. COMMANDS PERMISSION / PROHIBITION) 166 

9.3.15 FAJ / UAJ / CBU / BCP (BACKUP FUNCTION FOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE) 166 

10. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST 168 

10.1 PACKING SECTION 168 

10.2 REAR SECTION 170 

e 10.3 FRONT SECTION 172 

10.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2) 174 

10.5 CHASSIS SECTION (2/2) 176 

10.6 PANEL CHASSIS SECTION 178 

1 0.7 MULTI BASE SECTION 180 

10.8 PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F (AWU1272) 182 

■ 10.9 TABLE TOP STAND 184 

10.10 SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING) 185 

10.11 CS ASSY 186 


F 


PDP-501 0FD 


6 


1 


2 


3 


4 




5 


6 


7 


8 


1. SERVICE PRECAUTIONS 

1.1 NOTES ON SOLDERING 


• For environmental protection, lead-free solder is used on the printed circuit boards mounted in this unit. 

Be sure to use lead-free solder and a soldering iron that can meet specifications for use with lead-free solders for repairs 
accompanied by reworking of soldering. 

• Compared with conventional eutectic solders, lead-free solders have higher melting points, by approximately 40 °C. 
Therefore, for lead-free soldering, the tip temperature of a soldering iron must be set to around 373 °C in general, although 
the temperature depends on the heat capacity of the PC board on which reworking is required and the weight of the tip of 
the soldering iron. 

Compared with eutectic solders, lead-free solders have higher bond strengths but slower wetting times and higher melting 
temperatures (hard to melt/easy to harden). 

The following lead-free solders are available as service parts: 

• Parts numbers of lead-free solder: 

GYP1006 1.0 in dia. 

GYP1007 0.6 in dia. 

GYP1008 0.3 in dia. 


c 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


1.2 CHARGED SECTION AND HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING POINT 


■ Charged Section 

The places where the commercial AC power is used without 
passing through the power supply transformer. 

If the places are touched, there is a risk of electric shock. In 
addition, the measuring equipment can be damaged if it is 
| connected to the GND of the charged section and the GND of the 
non-charged section while connecting the set directly to the 
commercial AC power supply. Therefore, be sure to connect the 
set via an insulated transformer and supply the current. 


■ High Voltage Generating Point 

The places where voltage is 100 V or more except for the charged 
places described above. If the places are touched, there is a risk of 
electric shock. 

The VSUS voltage remains for several minutes after the power to 
the unit is turned off. These places must not be touched until 
about 10 minutes after the power is turned off, or it is confirmed 
with a tester that there is no residual VSUS voltage. 


B 1. Power Cord 

2. AC Inlet 

3. Power Switch 

4. Fuse (In the POWER SUPPLY Unit) 

5. STB Transformer and Converter Transformer 
(In the POWER SUPPLY Unit) 

| 6. Other primary side of the POWER SUPPLY Unit 


If the procedures described in “5.6. 1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER 
ON/OFF FUNCTION” are performed before the power is turned 
off, the voltage will be discharged in about 30 seconds. 


POWER SUPPLY UNIT 

50F X DRIVE Assy 

50F Y DRIVE Assy 

50F SCAN A Assy 

50F SCAN B Assy 

50F SCAN C Assy 

50F SCAN D Assy 





... (205 

V) 




.. (205 

V) 

.. (- 

-270 

V 

to 400 

V) 

.. (- 

-270 

V 

to 400 

V) 

...(- 

-270 

V 

to 400 

V) 

...(- 

-270 

V 

to 400 

V) 

...(- 

-270 

V 

to 400 

V) 


1 I : Part is Charged Section. 

CD Part is the High Voltage Generating Points 
other than the Charged Section. 



8 


Fig. High Voltage Generating Point (Rear view) 
PDP-5010FD 


i 


2 


3 


4 





5 


6 


7 


8 


2. SPECIFICATIONS 

2.1 ACCESSORIES 


A 


r 


• Remote control unit 


(AXD1550) 



• Alkaline dry cell battery (LR6, AA) 



• Binder Assy 
(AEC1908) 



• Cleaning cloth (AED1285) 




Operating instructions 
(PDP-501 OFD/KUCXC) 
(ARE1472) 



• Operating instructions 
(PDP-501 OFD/KUC) 
(ARE1487) 





• Band assy 
(AXY1192) 



• Power cord (2 m/6.6 feet) 
(ADG1215) 



Speaker accessories 


• Speaker cable: x2 
(SDS1202) 



• Bracket Assy (S): x2 
(SXG1127) 



Brackets for side: x2 


• Bracket Assy (C) 
(SXG1128) 



Brackets for center 


• Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 1 0 mm: Black): x9 
(BMZ50P100FTB) 





C 


D 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 


Item 

Number of pixel 

1 920 x 1 080 pixels 

Audio Amplifier 

17 W+ 17 W (1 kHz, 10%, 6 Q) 

Speakers 

Woofer: 4.8 cm x 13 cm cone type 
Tweeter: 2.5 cm semidome type 

Sound Effect 

SRS FOCUS/SRS/SRS TruBass 

Power Requirement 

120 V AC, 60 Hz, 442 W (26 W Standby) 

Weight 

Main unit: 38.5 kg (84.9 lbs.) 

Stand: 2.2 kg (4.9 lbs.) (including bolts) 
Speaker system: 3.3 kg (7.3 lbs.) (including 
cables, mounting fittings and screws) 

Total: 44.0 kg (97 lbs.) 

Reception System (Digital) 

ATSC Digital TV system 

Circuit type 

8VSB/64QAM/256QAM/QPSK demodulation 

Tuner VHF/UHF 

VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69 

CATV 

Ch. 2 to 135 

Audio format 

Dolby Digital 

Reception System (Analog) 

American TV standard NTSC system 

Circuit type 

Video signal detection PLL full synchronous detection, PLL digital Synthesizer system 

Tuner VHF/UHF 

VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69 

CATV 

ANT/CABLE A IN Ch. 1 to 135 ANT B IN Ch. 1 to 125 

Audio multiplex 

BTSC system 

Terminals Rear ANT/CABLE A IN 

75 Q UNBAL, F Type for DTV/VHF/UH F/C AT V in 

ANT B IN 

75 Q UNBAL, F Type for VHF/UHF/CATV in 

INPUT 1 

S-VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in 

INPUT 2 

COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in 

INPUT 4 

HDMI in*, AUDIO in 

PC INPUT 

Analog RGB in, AUDIO in 

INPUT 5 

HDMI in*, AUDIO in 

INPUT 6 

HDMI in* 

INPUT 7 

HDMI in* 

AUDIO OUT 

AUDIO out (Fixed) 

DIGITAL OUT 

Optical 

CONTROL OUT 

1 

SPEAKERS 

6 Q to 1 6 Q 

SUB WOOFER 

Variable 

CableCARD 

Point of Deployment 

Side INPUT 3 

COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in 

PHONES 

1 6 Q to 32 Q recommended 

USB 

USB in** 

On-screen display languages 

English/French/Spanish 


* This conforms to HDMI1 .3 and HDCP1 .1 . 

HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a digital interface that handles both video and audio using a single cable. 
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a technology used to protect copyrighted digital contents that use 
the Digital Visual Interface (DVI). 

E ** This conforms to USB 1 .1 and 2.0 . 

• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. 


■ Dimensions 



10 


1 


2 


3 


4 





5 


6 


7 


8 


2.3 PANEL FACILITIES 


■ Front Section 


Side Side 



1 (1) button (This button is located on the bottom 
on the rear panel (see D on Rear section). 

If the button is off, the power will not turn on 
even when TV(!)on the remote control unit or 
STANDBY/ON on the plasma display is 
pressed. To turn on the power, press (!))■ 

2 POWER ON indicator 

3 STANDBY indicator 

4 SLEEP indicator 

5 Room Light Sensor 

6 Remote control sensor 

7 STANDBY/ON button 


8 INPUT button (ENTER button*) 

9 VOLUME UP/DOWN buttons (UP/DOWN 
buttons*) 

10 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons (LEFT/RIGHT , 

buttons*) 

11 TV GUIDE button* 

12 USB port 

13 PHONES output terminal 

14 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, Pb, e 
Pr) 

15 INPUT 3 terminal (VIDEO) 

16 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO) 

The buttons with asterisks (*) can operate the TV Guide On 

Screen™ system. I 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


■ Rear Section 


c 


□ 





near the terminal compartment. 


1 (!) button 

2 CableCARD™ slot 

3 ANT/CABLE A IN terminal 

4 AC IN terminal 

5 INPUT 4 terminal (HDMI) 

6 INPUT 5 terminal (HDMI) 

7 INPUT 6 terminal (HDMI) 

8 INPUT 7 terminal (HDMI) 

9 PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB) 

10 CONTROL OUT terminal 

1 1 RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup) 

12 ANT B IN terminal 

13 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO) 

14 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) 

15 SUB WOOFER terminal 

16 AUDIO OUT terminals (AUDIO) 


17 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO) 

18 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO) 

19 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) 

20 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO) 

21 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) 

22 DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL) 

23 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO) 

24 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, Pb, 
PPr) 

25 SPEAKERS (R/L) terminals 

26 SPEAKERS (R) terminal (Speaker side) 

27 SPEAKERS (L) terminal (Speaker side) 


PDP-5010FD 


12 


i 


2 


3 


4 




5 


8 


■ Remote Control Unit 


This section describes the functions of the buttons available 
when the mode switch has been set to TV. 



1 TV (!) : Turns on the power to the plasma display or places it 
into standby mode. 

2 Transmission confirmation LED 

3 INPUT: Selects an input source of the plasma display. * 

(“INPUT1”, “INPUT 2 ”, “INPUT3”, “INPUT4”, “INPUT5", 

“INPUT6” and “INPUT 7”) 

4 SCREEN SIZE: Selects the screen size. 

5 AV SELECTION: Selects audio and video settings. (AV source: 
OPTIMUM, STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, USER. 

PC source: STANDARD, USER.) B 

6 INFO: Displays a channel banner when a TV program is being 
watched. 

When the TV Guide On Screen™ system is in operation, displays 
information about the currently highlighted channel (if available). 

7 HOME MENU: Displays the HOME MENU screen. 

MENU: Displays a panel menu when the TV Guide On Screen™ 
system is in operation. I 

8 DAY +/-: Jumps to the next or previous day of program listings 
in the TV Guide On Screen™ Listing sen/ice. 

9 ■+■/■+■/<-/-►: Selects a desired item on the menu screen. 

1 0 HDMI CONTROL: Displays the HDMI Control menu. 

1 1 FAVORITE CH (A, B, C, D): 

Selects any of the four preset channels. 

While watching, you can toggle the set channels by pressing A, 

B, C and D. 

12 0 to 9: Selects the channel. 

13 • (dot): Enters a dot. 

14 CH +/-: Selects the channel. 

15 SPLIT: Switches the screen mode among 2-screen, picture-in- 

picture, and single-screen. | 

1 6 FREEZE: Freezes a frame from a moving image. Press again to 
cancel the function. 

17 MTS: Selects MTS/SAP or language depending on the program 
being watched. 

18 ANT: Selects the antenna (A, B). 

1 9 PC: Selects the PC terminal as an input source. 

20 DISPLAY: Displays the channel information. D 

21 TV GUIDE: Displays the TV Guide On Screen™ system. 

22 ENTER: Executes a command. 

23 PAGE +/- (for the TV Guide On Screen™ system): Scrolls the 
program listing screen vertically. 

24 RETURN: Returns to the previous menu screen. 

25 CH ENTER: Executes a channel number. | 

26 CH RETURN: Returns to the previous channel. This button is 
disabled while the TV Guide On Screen™ system is displayed. 

27 VOL +/-: Sets the volume. 

28 c$ MUTING: Mutes the sound. 

29 SHIFT : Moves the location of the small screen when in the 
picture-in-picture mode. 

30 SWAP: Switches between the two screens when in the 2-screen e 
or picture-in-picture mode. 

Luminous remote control buttons 

All buttons on the remote control unit are luminous and gather 
and store light. This enables quick access to the desired 
function when performing operations in dark places. 


Q Note 

• When using the remote control unit, point it at the plasma 
display. 

F 


PDP-501 OFD 


13 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


3. BASIC ITEMS FOR SERVICE 

3.1 CHECK POINTS AFTER SERVICING 

Items to be checked after repair (PDP) 


To ensure the quality of the product after repair, check the recommended items shown below: 


No. 

Procedures 

Item to be checked 

1 

Check if all the symptoms pointed out by the customer have been 
addressed. 

The symptoms in question must not be reproduced. 

2 

Connect the peripheral equipment. 

Connect all external peripheral equipment as originally connected 
and check if the connections are correct. 

3 

Check the video and audio. 

Tune in to the stations that the customer would normally receive 
and check if video and audio are normal. 

4 

Check the buttons and controls. 

Use the buttons and controls on the remote control unit and main 
unit and check if they operate properly. 

5 

Check the cabinet. 

Check for any scratches or dirt that have been made or attached 
on the cabinet after receiving the product for repair. 


See the table below for the items to be checked regarding video and audio: 


Item to be checked regarding video 

Item to be checked regarding audio 

Block noise 

Distortion 

Horizontal noise 

Noise 

Dot noise 

Volume too low 

Disturbed image (video jumpiness) 

Volume too high 

Too dark 

Volume fluctuating 

Too bright 

Sound interrupted 

Mottled color 



PDP-5010FD 


14 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


3.2 QUICK REFERENCE 


Quick Reference upon Service Visit © 

Notes, PD/SD diagnosis, and methods for various settings 


Notes when visiting for service 

1. Notes when disassembling/reassembling 
© Rear case 

When reassembling the rear case, the screws must be tightened in a 
specific order. Be careful not to tighten them in the wrong order forcibly. 
For details, see "Rear Case" in "7. DISASSEMBLY". 

® Attaching screws for the HDMI connector 

When attaching the HDMI connector after replacing the Main Assy, 
secure the HDMI connector manually with a screwdriver, but not 
with an electric screwdriver. If you tighten the screws too tightly 
with an electric screwdriver, the screw heads may be damaged, in 
which case the screws cannot be untightened/tightened any more. 

2. On parts replacement 

© How to discharge before replacing the Assys 

A charge of significant voltage remains in the Plasma Panel even 
after the power is turned off. Safely discharge the panel before 
replacement of parts, in either manner indicated below: 

A: Let the panel sit at least for 3 minutes after the power is turned off. 
B: Turn the Large Signal System off before the power is turned off 
then, after 1 minute, turn the power off. 

For details, see "5.6.1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON/OFF 
FUNCTION". 

® On the settings after replacement of the Assys 

Some boards need settings made after replacement of the Assys. 
For details, see "8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT". 

3. On various settings 

© Setting in Factory mode 

After a Mask indication into the panel is performed, be sure to 
set the Mask setting to "OFF" then exit Factory mode. 



How to locate several items on the Factory menu 

' { } : Item on the Factory menu 1 
1 [ ] : Key on the remote control unit > 

! " " : Screen indication 1 


1. Confirmation of accumulated power-on time and power-on 
count 

Select {INFORMATION} then {HOUR METER}. 

(After entering Factory mode, press [4] five times.) 

2. Confirmation of the Power-down and Shutdown histories 
© Panel system 

PD: Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {POWER DOWN}. 

(After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press 
[ENTER/SET], then press [4] three times.) 

SD: Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {SHUT DOWN}. 

(After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press 
[ENTER/SET], then press [4] four times.) 

© MTB section 

Select {INFORMATION} then {MAIN NG}. 

(After entering Factory mode, press [4] three times.) 

3. How to display the Mask indication 
© Mask indication in the panel side 

1 . Select {PANEL FACTORY} then {RASTER MASK SETUP}. 

(After entering Factory mode, press [MUTING] once, press 
[ENTER/SET], then press [4] 8 times.) 

2. Press [ENTER/SET], then select a Mask indication, using [f] or [4-]. 


Adjustments and Settings after replacement of the 
Assys (Procedures in Factory mode) 

1. Digital Video Assy: Transfer of backup data 

© Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {BACKUP DATA}. (After entering Factory 
mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], press [4] seven times, then 
press [ENTER/SET].) 

© Select {TRANSFER}, using [^], then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 
seconds. 

© After transfer of backup data is completed, {ETC} is automatically selected, and the 
LED on the front panel returns to normal lighting. 

2. MAIN Assy: Execution of FINAL SETUP. 

© Select {INITIALIZE} then {FINAL SETUP}, then press [ENTER/SET]. (After entering 
Factory mode, press [MUTING] three times, then press [4] four times.) 

© Select "YES", using [^].Then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. 

© After "FINAL SETUP IS COMPLETE" is displayed on the screen, turn the POWER 
switch of the main unit off. 

3. POWER SUPPLY Unit: Clearance of the accumulated power-on count 
and maximum temperature value 

© Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {P COUNT INFO}. (After entering Factory 
mode, press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER/SET], press [-1] seven times, press 
[ENTER/SET], then press [4] six times.) 

© Press [■►] to select "CLEAR". Hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. 
After clearance is completed, "ETC" is automatically selected. Clear the maximum 
temperature value (MAX TEMP) in the same manner. 

4. Other Assys: Clearance of the maximum temperature value 

© Select {PANEL FACTORY}, {ETC}, then {MAX TEMP}. (After entering Factory mode, 
press [MUTING] once, press [ENTER], press [4-] seven times, press [ENTER/SET], 
then press [ 4 ] seven times.) 

© Press [■*] to select "CLEAR". Hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at least 5 seconds. 
After clearance is completed, "ETC" is automatically selected. 


C 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


15 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


Quick Reference upon Service Visit © 

Mode transition and structure of layers in Service Factory mode 


Mode transition in Service Factory mode 

To shift to another mode, press [MUTING]. 

To shift to another item in a specific mode, 
press [ t ] or [*]. 

To shift to the next nested layer below for an 
item with a "(+)" indication, press [ENTER/SET]. 
To return to the next nested layer above, 
also press [ENTER/SET]. 


MUTING 

m 

0 


MUTING 


MUTING 

o 

0 


PANEL FACTORY mode 

1. PANEL INFORMATION 

2. PANEL WORKS 

3. POWER DOWN 

4. SHUT DOWN 

5. PANEL-1 ADJ 

6. PANEL-2 ADJ 

7. PANEL FUNCTION 

8. ETC. 

9. RASTER MASK SETUP 

10. PATTEN MASK SETUP 

11. COMBI MASK SETUP 


INITIALIZE mode 

1. SIDE MASK LEVEL 

2. FINAL SETUP 

3. Wide XGA AUTO 


MUTING 

u • 


OPTION mode 

1. EDID WRITE MODE 

2. ANTENNA MODE 

3. AFT 

4. SYNC DET 


INFORMATION mode 

1. VERSION (1) 

2. VERSION (2), (3) 

3. MAIN NG 

4. TEMPERATURE 

5. HOUR METER 

6. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 

7. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 

8. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 

9. VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 

10. DTV TUNING STATUS 1, 2, 3 

11. DTV TV-GUIDE BER 

12. DEBUG INFO 



Structure of Layers in Service Factory Mode 

INFORMATION mode 



-1. VERSION (1) 

The software versions for each microcomputer 


-2. VERSION (2) 

The Flash memory versions for each device 


-3. VERSION (3) 

The Flash memory versions for each device 


-4. MAIN NG 

The shutdown message ID/event times 


1 

(Going Clear mode by [ENTER/SET] key) 


L 4-1. CLEAR 

Select Yes by [^] key ^ pushing and hold [ENTER/SET] key 


-5. TEMPERATURE 

The temperature/FAN rotating status/Room Light Sensor 


-6. HOUR METER 

The HOUR METER/P-COUNT information 


L 6-1. CLEAR 

Select Yes by [^] key ^ pushing and hold [ENTER/SET] key 


-7. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 

The information of HDMI information files 


-8. HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 

The information of HDMI information files 


-9.VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 

The signal information of VDEC 


-10.VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 

The signal information of VDEC 


-11. DTV TUNING STATUS 1 

Detail information for DTV 


- 12. DTV TUNING STATUS 2 

Detail information for DTV 


- 13. DTV TUNING STATUS 3 

Detail information for DTV 


-14. DTV TV-GUIDE BER 

For production line use 


-15. DEBUG INFO 

For factory use 


>ANEL FACTORY mode 

Refer to [PANEL FACTORY MODE] 


OPTION mode 



-1. EDID WRITE MODE 

For factory use 


-2. ANTENNA MODE 

For production line use 


- 3. AFT 

For production line use 


-4. SYNC DET 

For technical analysis 

1 

NITIALIZE mode 



-1. SIDE MASK LEVEL 
1-1-1. SIDE MASK LEVEL 

For factory use 


-2. FINAL SETUP 

Set to Factory default settings (it should perform after 


L 2-1 . DATA RESET 

replacing a MAIN Assy) 


-3. HMG/HG SERVICE MODE 
1-3-1. MODE SHIFT 

Information for a USB device is displayed 


1-4. Wide XGA AUTO 

For technical analysis 


Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 1 


Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 2 

1. PANEL INFORMATION 


Version indication of the panel 


7. PANEL FUNCTION (+) 


2. PANEL WORKS 


Indications of the accumulated power-on time, pulse-meter 



— 1 . R-LEVEL n 





count, and power-on count of the panel 



— 2. G-LEVEL 


3. POWER DOWN 


Indication of the Power-down history 



— 3. B-LEVEL 


4. SHUT DOWN 


Indication of the Shutdown history 



— 4. ADDRESS LI 

— Items for use by engineers 

5. PANEL-1 ADJ (+) 





— 5. ADDRESS L2 



— 1. VOL SUS 








— 2. VOL OFFSET 





— 11. ADDRESS U4 





— Settings required after replacement of the panel 



— 12. STK MODE 



— 8. VOL YNOFS4 




8. ETC (+) 



— 9. RESET1ST_KSB 





— 1 . BACKUP DATA 

For transferring backup data (after replacement of 


— 10. RESET2ND KSB 

Modification not required because these items 




the DIGITAL Assy) 




are basically for factory presetting 



— 2. DIGITAL EEPROM 

To clear data of the digital video 


— 23.YSTL FMR HZ 





— 3. PD INFO. — 



— 24. SUS FREQ 


For AM noise prevention (Depending on the mode, 



— 4. SD INFO. 

For clearance of data for the corresponding items. 




brightness of the screen changes.) 



— 5. HR-MTR INFO. 

The clearing method is the same: Select "CLEAR", 




For confirmation of the result of the setting change, 



— 6. PM/BI -B5 

— using [■+], then hold [ENTER/SET] pressed for at 




the unit must be turned off then back on again. 



— 7. P COUNT INFO. 

least 5 seconds. After clearance is completed, {ETC} 

6. PANEL-2 ADJ (+) 





— 8. MAX TEMP. 

is automatically selected. 


— 1. R-HIGH 




9. RASTER MASK SETUP (+) 



— 2.G-HIGH 





— 1 . MASK OFF — 



— 3 .B-HIGH 


Parameters for the WB adjustment of the panel, which are 



— 2. RST MASK 01 

For use while Raster Mask (full mask) is displayed. 


— 4. R-LOW 


required during adjustment after panel replacement 




Use [f] or [4-] to select the type of mask. 


— 5. G-LOW 





— 26. RST MASK 25 — 



— 6. B-LOW 




10. PATTEN MASK SETUP (+) 



— 7. ABL 


Setting of the power consumption. A setting table is 



— 1 . MASK OFF — 





available for each vertical signal. 



— 2. PTN MASK 01 

For use while Pattern Mask is displayed. Use [4] or 








[4] to select the type of mask. 

To "Structure of Layers in Panel Factory Mode 2" 



— 50. PTN MASK 49 — 







11. 

COMBI MASK SETUP (+) 








— 1 . MASK OFF — 








— 2. CMB MASK 01 

For use while Combination Mask is displayed. 








Use [f] or [4] to select the type of mask. 







1— 18.CMBMASK17 — 



F 


16 


PDP-501 OFD 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


3.3 PCB LOCATION 


— Note: 

The wiring shown in the photo is different from the actual wiring, because the product in the photo is a prototype. 
Upon servicing, be sure to restore the original wiring of the unit after repair work. 


PANEL SENSOR FHD FAN CONNECT 


Assy 


Assy 




POWER SUPPLY 
Unit 


50FY DRIVE 
Assy 


50FX DRIVE 
Assy 


TANSHI Assy 

n • 


50F ADDRESS L 
Assy 


< 

o 

w 


< >. 

O w 


o 

z 

5 S’ 

LL 

O 

in 


5 S’ 

LL 

O 

lO 


FHD IR Assy 

• Bottom view 


FHD RLS 
Assy 



Mark 

No. Description 

Part No. 

Mark No. Description 

Part No. 

LIST OF ASSEMBLIES 




NSP 

50F ADDRESS L ASSY 

AWW1310 

A MAIN ASSY 

AWV2457 

NSP 

50 F ADDRESS S ASSY 

AWW1311 






SIDE IO ASSY 

AWW1274 

NSP 

50 F SCAN A ASSY 

AWW1312 

SIDE KEY ASSY 

AWW1275 


L- IC2801 - IC2804 

AN16174A 

TANSHI ASSY 

AWW1334 

NSP 

50 F SCAN B ASSY 

AWW1313 

FHD IR ASSY 

AWW1289 


L IC2901 - IC2904 

AN16174A 

FHD FAN CONNECT ASSY 

AWW1290 

NSP 

50F SCAN C ASSY 

AWW1314 




L IC3001 - IC3004 

AN16174A 

50FHD LED ASSY 

AWW1291 

NSP 

50F SCAN D ASSY 

AWW1315 

FHD RLS ASSY 

AWW1292 


1 — IC3101 - IC3104 

AN16174A 

FHD POWER SW ASSY 

AWW1293 


50FX DRIVE ASSY 

AWV2510 

POD ASSY 

AWW1295 


50FY DRIVE ASSY 

AWV2511 




PANEL SENSOR ASSY 

AWW1309 

A POWER SUPPLY UNIT 

AXY1168 


50F DIGITAL ASSY 

AWW1316 






PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F 

AWU1272 


PDP-5010FD 





1 


2 


3 


4 


3.4 JIGS LIST 


Name 

Jig No. 

Remarks 

Service Cotton Cloth Glove 

GYX1002 

7.3 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY 
PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM 


B 


C 


3.5 CLEANING 



Name 

Part No. 

Remarks 

Cleaning liquid 

GEM 1004 

Used to fan cleaning. 

Refer to “10.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2)”. 

Cleaning paper 

GED-008 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


18 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 





4. BLOCK DIAGRAM 

4.1 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2) 


l in a a a i 
AKP1 322- 


5 0 F ADDRESS 
L ASS’ Y 



rrrx 


!?) 





5 0 F SCAN 
C ASS’ Y 
(LOW S I D E_ 

AWV251 2- 
AWW1 31 4 


1 A n 


1 40 


AKM1 384- 

i An 

4 0 



O 


5 0 F SCAN 
D ASS’ Y 
(LOW SIDE 

AWV251 2- 
AWW1 31 5 


_LOW) 


3 P 1 E C E 

lZDj 

s 


CONNECTOR 

g ; 



CN01 03 

rwi rwi ss 




CN2305 CN2306 

- 



M io ® ® ® ® ®i — o ® ® ® ® ®i — 

J 


FERRITE 
CORE 
F 0 0 04 

ATX1 048- 

g 1 > O 0 J 2 0 5 (40) 

< o' + o ? ADD1 502- 

§ z > C 

<d> j) <b (j) i> (SI h 

CN1801 CN180; 

AKM1292- -TBB AKM1548 1 



CONNECTOR 

P I N ASS I GN 


5 0 F ADDRESS 
S ASS' Y 
AWV2509- 
AWW1 3 1 1 (ADR4) 


J204 (40 

< o' + 5 + ADD1501- 

“ * 2 
hmmmi — n 


5 0 F ADDRESS 
L ASS’ Y 
AWV2509- 
AWW1 3 1 0 ( AD R 3 ) 


CN3501 

foTil 

-> CN1602 

HadTI 

CN3502 

foul 

- CN1602 

HadTI 

CN3503 

D15 

-> CN1602 

[adTI 

CN3504 

D16 

-> CN1802 

"adTI 

CN3505 

D1 7 

-> CN1802 

~AD1~I 

CN3506 

D1 8 

-> CN1602 

~adT1 

CN3507 

D1 9 

-> CN1602 

IdT] 

CN3508 

D20 

-> CN1602 

7d3 


CN2502 


I Y2 I - 


CN2901 ISB1 


1-40. 

NC 


21-20. 

CP 


2-39. 

ADR 

PD 

??-1 

9. 

NC 


3-38. 

PSI 

IE 

23-1 

B. 

GND 

LVDS 

4-37. 

GND 


24-1 

/. 

NC 


5-36. 

NC 


2 b— 1 

H. 

Cl KN 


6-35. 

NC 


2H-1 

b. 

Cl KP 


7-34. 

GND 


2 /-I 

4. 

NC 


8-33. 

GND 

LVDS 

2 H— 1 

3. 

GND 

LVDS 

9-32. 

NC 


29-1 

2. 

NC 


1 0-31 . 

AN 


3 0-1 

1 . 

l)N 


11-30. 

AP 


31-1 

0. 

DP 


1 2-29. 

NC 


3 2- 

9. 

NC 


13-28. 

GND 

LVDS 

33- 

B. 

GND 

LVDS 

14-27. 

NC 


34- 

/ 

GNI) 


1 5-26. 

BN 


3 b- 

H. 

NC 


1 6-25. 

HP 


3 b- 

b. 

NC 


17-24. 

NC 


3/- 

4. 

GND 


18-23. 

GND 

LVDS 

3H- 

3. 

1 SI 


1 9-22. 

NC 


39- 

2. 

GND 



1. VH 15. 

2. VH 16. 

3. NC 17. 

4. NC 18. 

5. NC 19. 

6. NC 20. 

7. NC 21. 

8. NC 22. 

9. GNDH_VH 23. 
1 0. GNDH_VH 24. 

11. GNDH_VH 25. 

12. NC 26. 

13. NC 27. 

14. NC 28. 


29. NC 

30. GNDH DIG 

31. GNDH DIG 

32. CLK_R 

33. LE 

34. 0C1 

35. 0C2_H 

36. CLR 

37. SI 

38. GNDH_RH 
NC 39. NC 

NC 40. I C5V 

NC 

NC 


CN2501 


fvH - 


CN3001 [SCI 


1. VH 15. 

2. VH 16. 

3. NC 17. 

4. NC 18. 

5. NC 19. 

6. NC 20. 

7. NC 21. 

8. NC 22. 

9. GNDH_VH 23. 
1 0. GNDH_VH 24. 

11. GNDH VH 25. 

12. NC 26. 

13. NC 27. 

14. NC 28. 


29. NC 

30. GNDH_RL 

31. GNDH_D I G 

32. GNDH_D 1 G 

33. SI 

34. CLK L 

35. LE 

36. 0C1 

37. 0C2_L 

38. CLR 

39. NC 

40. I C5V 


CN2902 


CN2801 I SA1 


1. VH 

2. VH 

3. NC 

4. NC 

5. NC 

6. NC 

7. NC 

8. NC 

9. GNDH 

1 0. GNDH' 

11. GNDH' 

12. NC 

13. NC 

14. NC 


1 5. NC 
1 6. NC 
1 7. NC 
1 8. NC 
1 9. NC 

20. NC 

21. NC 

22. NC 
VH 23. NC 
VH 24. NC 
VH 25. NC 

26. NC 

27. NC 

28. NC 


29. NC 

30. J SI 

31. GRDH DIG 

32. CLK_R 

33. LE 

34. 0C1 

35. 0C2 H 

36. CLR 

37. SI 

38. GNDH_RH 

39. NC 

40. I C5V 


CN3002 


CN31 01 ISD1 


1. VH 

2. VH 

3. NC 

4. NC 

5. NC 

6. NC 

7. NC 

8. NC 

9. GNDH 

1 0. GNDH' 

11. GNDH' 

12. NC ' 

13. NC 

14. NC 


15. NC 

16. NC 
1 7. NC 
1 8. NC 
1 9. NC 

20. NC 

21. NC 

22. NC 
VH 23. NC 
VH 24. NC 
VH 25. NC 

26. NC 

27. NC 

28. NC 


29. NC 

30. GNDH RL 

31. GNDH_D I G 

32. SI 

33. CLK_L 

34. LE 

35. 0C1 

36. 0C2_L 

37. CLR 

38. J_SI 

39. NC 

40. I C5V 



CN3201 


CN41 01 I Ml I 


CN5509 ["dtH - 


1- 50. 

2- 49. 

3- 48. 

4- 47. 

5- 46. 

6- 45. 

7- 44. 

8- 43. 

9- 42. 

1 0- 41. 

11- 40. 
1 2-39. 
1 3-38. 
14-37. 
1 5-36. 
16-35. 
1 7-34. 


GND 

LVDS ON 

REQjdD 

RXD_MD 

TXD_MD 

GND 

GND 

LVDS_E1 + 
LVDS_E1 - 
GND 

LVDS D1+ 
LVDS_D1 - 
GND 

LVDS_CLK1 + 
LVDS_CLK 1 - 
GND 

LVDS C1+ 


18- 33. 

19- 32. 

20- 31. 

21- 30. 

22- 29. 

23- 28. 

24- 27. 

25- 26. 

26- 25. 

27- 24. 

28- 23. 

29- 22. 

30- 21. 

31- 20. 

32- 19. 

33- 18. 

34- 17. 


LVDS C1- 
GND 

LVDS_B1 + 
LVDS_B1 - 
GND 

LVDS A1+ 
LVDS_A1 - 
GND 
GND 

LVDS E0+ 
LVDS E0- 
GND 

LVDS_D0+ 

LVDS_D0- 

GND 

LVDS CLK0+ 
LVDS CLK0- 


35- 1 6. 

36- 15. 

37- 14. 

38- 13. 

39- 1 2. 

40- 11. 

41- 1 0. 


GND 

LVDS C0+ 
LVDS C0- 
GND 

LVDS_B 0 + 
LVDS_B 0- 
GND 

LVDS A0 + 

LVDS_A0- 

GND 

GND 

MSEL 

RELAY2 

V+3 3V_UC0M 

MODE 

GND 


1- 50. 

2- 49. 

3- 48. 

4- 47. 

5- 46. 

6- 45. 

7- 44. 

8- 43. 

9- 42. 

10- 41. 

11- 40. 

12- 39. 

13- 38. 

14- 37. 

15- 36. 
1 6-35. 
17-34. 


YCN_PD 
VYPRST AC 
SCAN_PD 
GND 

YDD PD 

YVOFS_ADu 

YSUS PD 

GND 

YRSV1 

YRSV2 

GND 

YKN0FS4 

YKN0FS3 

YKN0FS2 

YKN0FS1 

GND 

YSOFT-G 


20 


PDP-501 OFD 


1 


2 


3 


4 




5 


6 


7 


8 


Grower cord 


TO MAIN ASS' Y 
J 1 0 6 (12115) 

ADX3554- 


JUMPER 
CONNECTOR 
J 1 2 6 (4) 

ADX3545- 

VHR-4M 
|© © © ©| 


5) 

2 - 



~ |© © © ©1 ](j) (2) (j) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (jj) ^ (j, jfe (&~ 1 (j) (j) (?) (!) (j) (g) (?) (g) (9) (& jj) (§T— 


B 1 5B-PH-K-S 


1 2B-PH-K-S 


iptti 


[pE 


EE 


J1 04 
(14) 

ADX3553- 


POWE R SUPPLY UNIT 
AXY 1 168— 


rP4~l 

B14B-PH-K-S 


j Q Q UJ | C/J 
’ C3 C3 & C> 


J 2 1 1 (50) 

ADD1 508- 


TO 

MA I N ASS' Y 


> > O 5 > O- 

/ 

r 


— lL_ 

50} 


rmTI 


5 0 F D I G I TAL ASS' Y 

AWV2508- 
AWW1 31 6 


I 


I 


I 


J 2 0 1 (40 

ADD1498- 


XI 

II I > 


J 2 0 9 (4 0) 

A0D1 506- 


J 2 1 0 (40) 

ADD1 507- 


J 2 0 2 (4 0) 

ADD! 499- 


J 2 0 3 (4 0) 

AD01 500- 


AD1 (ADR2) 

— H> 


5 0 F ADDRESS 
L ASS' Y 
AWV2509- 
AWW1 31 0 (ADR7) 


L- |<P <j> (j> 9 <j> 9l n 



5 0 F ADDRESS 
S ASS’ Y 
AWV2509- 
AWW1 31 1 (ADR8) 


HIMMa — G 




[EE 


[PB~| 


1 

J1 02 (8&8) 

ADX3551 - 

r 

©■ 

VSUS 

© 

O' 

VSUS 

© 


NC 



GND_SUS 

© 

©- 

GND_SUS 

© 

©- 

GND 

© 

®- 

V+6_5V 



V+1 6 5V 

© 

l 

€>■ 

NC 

l 

O' 

V+5_1 V 

© 

®- 

GND 

© 

& 

V+12V 

© 

©■ 

GND_ADR 

© 

Oh 

NC 

© 

O' 

VADR 

© 

e- 

VADR 

© 


— (!) © © © © ® 
CN1 204 
KM200NA6L 


1 J 2 1 0 ( 4 0 ) 

ADD1 507- 

FERRITE 
CORE 
F 0 0 0 8 

ATX1048- 

J1 1 2 ( 6 & 6 ) 

ADX3559- 


□ 0 




rxE 


be 

be 


© © © (4) (5) (j) — 
CN1 203 
KM200NA6L 


BE 


o“ 


5 0 F X 
ASS 


DRIVE 

Y 


AWV251 0- 


O 

HOT 

PLATE 


o_ 




J 2 0 1 (40) 

ADD1498- 


D22 

<n — 


“EH] 


BE 


BE 


{b ® o « ® ®] |c) ® ® o ® (s}- 



J 1 0 8 (616) 

ADX3556- 


J203 (40) n | n 

ADD1 500- U J U 


HEEEEEE — Q 


5 0 F ADDRESS 
L ASS' Y 
AWV2509- 
AWW1 3 1 0 (ADR2) 



HMEEEE — G 


5 0 F ADDRESS 
L ASS’ Y 
AWV2509- 
AWW1 3 1 0 (ADR1 ) 


CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGN CN551 0 [D 22 E CN 1 001 fxT 


1-40. XCN 

PD 

11-30. GND 

21-20. GND 




2-39. NC 


12-29. XPRST 

22-1 9. XKOFS1 ADJ 




3-38. GND 


1 3-28. GND 

23-18. XKOFS2 ADJ 




4-37. XSUS 

R 

14-27. XK0FS1 

24-1 7. GND 




5-36. GND 


15-26. GND 

25-1 6. XDRV PD 




6-35. XSUS 

U 

16-25. XK0FS2 

26-1 5. XDD PD 




7-34. GND 


1 7-24. GND 

27-14. PSW2 




8-33. XSUS 

D 

1 8-23. XSOFT D 

28-13. GND 




9-32. GND 


19-22. GND 

29-1 2. XRSV1 




10-31. XSUS 

_G 

20-21. SUS MUTE 

30-11. XRSV2 

40- 

1 . 

XSUS_PD 


45509 I D21 ] -» CN2001 I Y1 


1 — »5 0 . 

2- 49. 

3- 48. 

4- 47. 

5- 46. 

6- 45. 

7- 44. 

8- 43. 

9- 42. 

0- 41. 

1- 40. 

2- 39. 

3- 38. 

4- 37. 

5- 36. 

6- 35. 

7- 34. 


YCN PD 
VYPRST ADJ 
SCAN_PI5 
GND 

YDD PD 

YVOFS ADJ 

YSUS_FD 

GND 

YRSV1 

YRSV2 

GND 

YKN0FS4 

YKNOFS3 

YKNOFS2 

YKN0FS1 

GND 

YSOFT-G 


18- 33. 

19- 32. 

20- 31. 

21- 30. 

22- 29. 

23- 28. 

24- 27. 

25- 26. 

26- 25. 

27- 24. 

28- 23. 

29- 22. 

30- 21. 

31- 20. 

32- 19. 

33- 18. 

34- 1 7. 


SUS MUTE 

YSNUFS 

GND 

YRST-D 
YSUS LMSK 
YSUS_HMSK 
GND 

YSUS-D 

YPR-U 

YSUS-G 

GND 

YSUS-U 

YRSV3 

YSUS-B 

ESW 

GND 

CLK_L 


35- 1 6. 

36- 15. 

37- 14. 

38- 1 3. 

39- 1 2. 

40- 11. 

41- 1 0. 


OC2 L 
SI 

CLK_H 

GND 

LE 

OC1 

OC2 H 

CLR 

GND 

YVKNOFS4_AD J 
YVKN0FS3 ADJ 
YVKNOFS1 2_AD J 
GND 

SCN5V PD 

YDRV_FD 

PSW2 


When ordering service parts, be sure to refer to "EXPLODED 
VIEWS and PARTS LIST" or "PCB PARTS LIST". 

The A mark found on some component parts indicates the 
importance of the safety factor of the part. Therefore, when 
replacing, be sure to use parts of identical designation. 


XI 


PDP-501 0 F D 


A W V 2 4 7 2 - 


PDP-5010FD 


OVERALL DIAGRAM 

PDP-501 0 FD 


21 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


4.2 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2) 


AXM1 064- A 


FAN MOTOR 
8 0 * 2 5 L 


® 


— [Y Y T — [( 


TO POWER 
SUPPLY UNIT 


J 1 0 7 (5) 

ADX3555- 


TO FHD 

D I G I TAL ASS’ Y 


J 2 1 1 (50) 

ADD1508- Y 


TO POWER SUPPLY UNIT 

J 1 0 B ( 1 2& 1 5 ) 

ADX3554- 


Q Q Q 
-Z.-Z.-Z. 
C3 O O 


J1 1 9 (8/4) 

ADX3531 - 


- |© © ® ®! 



C 

[faTI 

CN9551 

KM200NA4 


Q Z Q 

I z I z 

(3 Z <3 


LH- 

- LL- -© 
LH+ -® . 

- LL+ -® £ 

- RL- -0 \ 
RH- -® 

- RL+ -® 
RH+ [© 


no6i 


J CN8806 
B5P-VH 


GND 

V+8V_AU 


•3_3V_A © ®- | « 


GND 

V+3_3V_AU_D 

GND 


CN41 01 
AKM1 34 9- -TBB 

CmS 

& 

& 

& « 


— [®&d)(T>t«)(i>d)<s>ti>ife666i& i51 — Rfc d>d)d>d>d>(z)(«)(«)4b6451 |cb <b d> <§ 


TANSH I 
ASS’ Y 

(50/60FR) 
(XI ) 

AWW1 334 


J21 3 (40) 

ADD1 491 - 


|~M9l 


floTI 


R+ © 
R- © ; 
L- © j 
L+ © ■ 


J 2 1 2 (50) 

ADD1441- 


g |~MBl 


MAIN ASS’ Y (US FHD R 
AWV2457 - 


FERRITE 

L 0 0 0 1 

ATX1 044- 


CORE 


[MTTI 

CN41 07 
KM200NA6 

-^) (2) (3) (4) (5) (^J- 


©■ 


©■ 


©■ 


& 


& 


& 


& 


J 1 1 8 ( 1 1 ) 

ADX3563- 

HP_L 

GND 

HP_R 

GND 

I NPUT3_L 
GND 

I NPUT3_R 
GND 

I NPUT3_V 
GND 

HP_PLUG 

J1 25 (7) 

ADX3566- 
I NPUT3_PR 
GND 

I NPUT3_PB 
GND 

I NPUT3_Y 
GND 

I NPUT3_PLUG 


rsn 


SIDE 

ASS’ 

(US 


I 0 
Y 
R) 


OKI ) AWW1 274 


rsn 


J 1 1 5 (6) 

ADX3561 - 




a a u 


J 1 1 7 
(6/6/3) 

ADX3562- 


<S) 


— ® d> d ) ® ® ® — — .... © ® ® © ® ® ^ 


rrn 

50 FHD LED 
ASS’ Y 
OKI) 

AWW1 291 


FHD RLS 
ASS’ Y 
OKI) 

AWW1 292 


22 


PDP-5010FD 



5 


6 


7 


8 


1064- AXM1064- AXM1064- 



1% 

1% 

iil 




( 3& 3& 3 ) 

ADX3565- 


t <I> H 5 > d) J>Hcb <t (gl - H 5 > & 


NO USE 


FHD FAN 
CONNECT ASS’ Y 
AS (XI) 


FAN MOTOR/O 
8 0 * 2 5 L 

AXM1058- 


lA <t> 4 1 1 1 1 1 


J 1 2 2 (4 ) 


TRAP SW 
S 0 0 0 2 

ASG1 089- 


J 1 2 7 ( 3 ) 

ADX3546- 


' d> (j) tSl — 


— TS> <b <f >1 |(j) <§ (a)F 

CN41 0 
KM200N A 

l~M4l 


s 

J 2 1 4 (40) 



ADD1519- 

(S 


g rcn 


J 2 1 5 (40) 


POD ASS' Y (US) 

AWV2496- 
AWW1 295 


SHIELD 

in 

GND — 


D+ — 


D- — 


VBUS 

- 


i (p <$ <$ ^ <st>J— 


USB CABLE 
J 3 0 1 (5) 

ADF1 034- 


CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGN 


CN4004 l~M6 I -i CN8804 I 104 


1-50. 

GND 


26-25. 

GND 


2-49. 

TEMP2 


27-24. 

INPUT2 

V 

3-48. 

NC 


28-23. 

GND 


4-47. 

V+3 3V 

UCOM 

29-22. 

INPUT1 

V 

5-4 6. 

NC 


30-21. 

GND 


6-45. 

GND 


31-20. 

INPUT1 

SY 

7-44. 

GND 


32-19. 

GND 


8-43. 

GND 


33-1 8. 

INPUT1 

S2 

9-42. 

GND 


34-1 7. 

GND 


10-41. 

GND 


35-16. 

INPUT1 

SC 

1 1-40. 

GND 


36-15. 

GND 


1 2-39. 

GND 


37-14. 

INPUT1 

SPLUG 

1 3-38. 

I NPUT3 

PLUG 

38-1 3. 

GND 


14-37. 

GND 


39-12. 

INPUT2 

PLUG 

15-36. 

I NPUT3 

Y 

40-11. 

GND 


1 6-35. 

GND 


41-1 0. 

INPUT2 

Y 

1 7-34. 

1 NPUT3 

PB 

42- 9. 

GND 


18-33. 

GND 


43- 8. 

INPUT2 

PB 

19-32. 

I NPUT3 

PR 

44- 7. 

GND 


20-31. 

GND 


45- 6. 

INPUT2 

PR 

21-30. 

AIR R 


46- 5. 

GND 


22-29. 

GND 



GND 


23-28. 

AIR L 


48- 3. 

GND 


24-27. 

GND 


49- 2. 

GND 


25-26. 

INPUT3 

.V 

50- 1. 

GND 



CN4001 I M8 ] -> CN8803 [ 


1- 

■4 PI. 

V+5V A 

21- 

20. 

?- 

39. 

NC 

72— 

1 

9. 

3- 

38. 

V+3 3V STB 

73- 

1 

8. 

4- 

3/. 

NC 

24- 

1 

/. 

5- 

36. 

GND 

2b- 

1 

6. 

H- 

35. 

GND 

7b- 

1 

b. 

/- 

44. 

GND 

2/- 

1 

4. 

8- 

33. 

GND 

28- 

1 

3. 

9- 

V/ 

IR OUT 

79- 

1 

7. 

1 0- 

31 . 

GNU 

30- 

1 

1 . 

11- 

30. 

GND 

31- 

1 

0. 

12- 

79. 

AC AM MUTE 

.37- 


9. 

1 3- 

28 

GND 

33- 


8. 

14- 

2 /. 

AC HP MUTE 

34- 


/. 

15- 

76. 

HP PLUG 

35- 


6. 

16- 

75. 

GNU 

36- 


b. 

1 H 

74 

SPDIF HNM 

3/- 


4. 

1 8- 

73. 

GND 

38- 


3. 

19- 

7 7. 

SPDIF DTV 

39- 


2. 

20- 

21. 

GND 

40- 


1. 


I 2S_SDATA_HNM 
I 2S_BCLK HNM 
I 2S_LRCLK_HNM 
GND 

I 2S_SDAT A_HDM I 
I 2S_BCLK HDMI 
I2S_LRCLK_HDMI 
GND 

I2S SDATA DTV 
I 2S_BCLK UTV 
I2S_LRCLR_DTV 
GND 

SCL_AV 
SDA AV 
AC A MUTE 
RST_MSP 
OTW 
A NG B 
IU DFT 
GNU 


CN4005 1 M33 I -» CN9402 [cT 


1- 

40. 

GND 

21- 

20. 

I ORD 

2- 

39. 

POD VCC 

22- 

1 9. 

MA1 1 

3- 

38. 

POD VCC 

23- 

1 8. 

POD VS1 

4- 

3 /. 

POD VCC 




5- 

36. 

MDIA3 

25- 

18. 

CE2A 

6- 

35. 

RDY/IRQA 

26- 

b. 

MAI 0 

7- 

34. 

MDIA2 

27- 

14 

MD0A7 

8- 

33. 

WE 

28- 

3. 

CE1 A 

9- 

32. 

MDI A1 

29- 

7. 

MD0A6 

10- 

31. 

GND 

30- 

1 1 . 

MD7 

11- 

30. 

M0CLKA/MA1 4 

31- 

1 0. 

MD0A5 

1 2- 

79. 

GND 

32- 

9. 

MD6 

13- 

28. 

MDIA0 

33- 

8 . 

MD0A4 

14- 

21. 

MAI 3 

34- 

/ 

MD5 

1 5- 

76. 

MISTRTA 

35- 

6. 

MD0A3 

1 6- 

75 . 

GND 




17- 

74. 

POD CLK/MA8 

37- 


CD1 A 

18- 

23. 

GND 

38- 

3. 

MD3 

1 9- 

7 7 . 

I OWR 

39- 

2. 

GND 

20- 

21. 

POD DATA/MA9 

40- 

1 . 

GND 


CN4006 


CN9401 (C2 


1 -*40. 

2- *39. 

3- »38. 

4- *37. 

5- >36. 

6- 35. 

7- *34. 

8- 33. 

9- *32. 
1 0— *3 1 . 
11-30. 
1 2-29. 
1 3-28. 

14- 27. 

15- 26. 
1 6-25. 
1 7-24. 

18- 23. 

19- 22. 

20- 21. 


GND 

PTXDB 

GND 

PRXDB 

GND 

CDA2 

MD0A2 

MD2 

MD0A1 

MD1 

MDOA0 

MD0 

MOSTRTA 

MA0 

MOVALA 

MAI 

REG 

MA2 

GND 

MA3 


21 - 20 . 

22- 19. 

23- 18. 

24- 1 7. 

25- 1 6. 

26- 15. 

27- 14. 

28- 1 3. 

29- 1 2. 

30- 11. 

31- 10. 

32- 9. 

33- 8. 


37- 

38- 

39- 


WAITA 
OOB EN/MA4 
RSTA 
TX I 
POU VS2 
TX FN 
MDTA7 
TX Q 
MDTA6 
MAI 2 
MDIA5 
GND 

MICLKA 

GND 

MDIA4 

MIVALA 

POD VPP 

POD_VPP 

GND 

GND 


w J 1 1 4 
> > > (11/6/4) 
£ £ l °. ADX3560- 



XI 


PDP-501 0FD 


AWV2472- 


1© © © ®| 

CN9501 

KM200 NA4L 

[SWT] 

SIDE KEY 
ASS' Y (US) 
(XI) 

AWW1 275 


The mark found on some component parts 
should be replaced with same parts 
(safety regulation authorized) of identical 


des i gnat i on. 


OVERALL DIAGRAM 

PDP-501 0 FD 


PDP-501 OFD 


23 



1 


2 


3 


4 


4.3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) 


50F ADDRESS L ASSY 50F ADDRESS L ASSY 




5 


6 


7 


8 


50F ADDRESS L ASSY 


50F ADDRESS S ASSY 



50F ADDRESS L ASSY 


50F ADDRESS L ASSY 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


25 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


4.4 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 



1 


PDP-501 OFD 


26 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


: Analog Audio signal | 
: Analog Video signal 
: Component signal 
: Digital Video signal 
: Digital Audio signal 
: Synchronized signal 
: Data signal 
: Control signal 
: RF signal 


POWER SUPPLY UNIT 


IC4801 

CM0048BF 

(VDEC) 


RCR_AD 

BCB_AD 

GY_AD 


3 


DIN4 

DIN3 


MD_VDEC 

MA_VDEC 

MCTRL 


IC4802 

HY57V161610FTP 

(SDRAM) 


IC5001 

AD9985KSTZ 

(ADC) 


DIN5_RCR 

DIN5_BCB 

DIN5_GY 


HD_PLL 

HOLD_PLL 

CLP_AD 




LED_ON1/ON2/OFF 


TXDJF/RXDJF 


TXD/RXD_DT 


M_SW_DET 

AC_DET_DRV 


VD_0 

r : -t- » 

RB_0 I 
GB_0 

bb: ° I v 


IC8001 

PD6568A-K 

(ARIA) 


A A A 


IC8401 
UPD61 123F1 
(EMMA2SV) 


RA_0 

GA_0 

BA_0 


IC4101 

BU8254KVT 

(LVDS) 




IC4102 

BU8254KVT 

(LVDS) 


MA_ARIA_A 

^_MD^RI^^ 


IC8201 

EDD1232ABBH 
(128Mbit DDR) 


MA_ARIA_B 
^ MD_ARIA_B^ 


IC8202 

EDD1232ABBH 
(128Mbit DDR) 


MA_ARIA_C 


IC8203 

EDD1232ABBH 
(128Mbit DDR) 


EXD_ARIA 
^ EXA_ARIA ^ 

< > 


IC8204 
AGC1049- 
(16Mbit Flash) 


IC5201 
SII9025CTU 
(HDMI RX) 


A 


FAN_ON1/CONT1 X FAN_ON2/CONT2 J 


AO to 19 
DQO to 15 


IC8402 

AGC1039- 

(FLASH) 


IC4310 

PQ200WNA1ZPH 
(FAN CONTROL) 


IC4303 

PQ200WNA1ZPH 
(FAN CONTROL) 






1 

1 1 



1 1 













LED 


1 

1 

TRAP SW 

1 1 
1 1 

FAN 

1 1 
1 1 

50 FHD LED ASSY 

I 

i — 

1 1 
1 1 



1 1 

1 1 
1 1 


A A 


IC5101 
CXB1442 
(HDMI SW) 


^ A A > 


Input 4 
HDMI 


Input 5 
HDMI 


Input 6 
HDMI 


r 




TXD_MD 

RXD_MD 

REO_MD 


Input 7 
HDMI 


FHD FAN k 

CONNECT 

ASSY 


l l l 

j FAN j j FAN j |~FAn| 


PDP-5010FD 


DIGITAL 

ASSY 


i 

L. 


27 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 



SECONDARY I PRIMARY 


1 


2 


3 


4 


4.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 



PDP-5010FD 


28 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


4.6 50F X DRIVE ASSY 


A 


50F X DRIVE ASSY 



B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


29 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


4.7 50F Y DRIVE, 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS 


50F SCAN B ASSY 
(HIGH-SIDE_LOW) 

50F SCAN A ASSY 
(HIGH-SIDE_HIGH) 



IC5V/VF 

DC/DC 

CONV. 


+3.3V VADR 

\m\Ti 

i i 


Photo Coupler 

Scan Signal 

□Dl 


r 


50F SCAN D ASSY 
(LOW-SIDE_LOW) 


50F SCAN C ASSY 
(LOW-SIDE_HIGH) 


F 


30 


PDP-5010FD 



5 


6 


7 


8 


4.8 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of 50F X, Y DRIVE and 50F SCAN A, B, C and D ASSYS 


A 



50F SCAN A, B, C, D ASSYS 


c 


D 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


31 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


4.9 50 F ADDRESS L and S ASSYS 


A 


B 


50F ADDRESS L ASSY 



50F ADDRESS S ASSY 


D 


E 


F 


32 



1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


4.10 50F DIGITAL ASSY 


50F DIGITAL ASSY 


l~M 


V+2_5V_D V+1_2V_D 

A 


V+3V_EE 

A_ 


1.2V 

REG. 


V+2_5V_D V+1_8V_D 

A 


1.8V 

REG. 


A 

+1 _8\j 


VH_UV_PD, 

YDRIVE_PD, 

YRESNC_PD, 

YDD_CHV_PD, 

IC5V_UV_PD 


VOFS_ADJ,YPRST_ADJ, 

XKN0FS1_2_ADJ, 


XKN0FS3_ADJ,XKN0FS4_ADJ, 




Vsus_ADJ 
PD_TRG_B, AC_DET, M_SW_DET 


SCL, 

SDA 


ST0P_SQ I Pulse 
Width 


3 3V D 


fl 


5 V D 



DC-DC 


CONVERTER 


BD8602FV 

IV D 

IC3801 




A — D >o_ D >o — 
i — D>°-C> 0 n 


Pulse 

Width 


P D i\ 

rH>°- 



XSUSTN_PD, 

XDD_CNV_PD, 

XDRIVE_PD 


XK0FS1_ADJ,XKN0FS2_ADJ 


SUS_MUTE 


V+3VACTV 
V+3VACTV ^ 


MODULE UCOM 


M30620FCPGP 

IC3601 


Flash Memory 
IC3302 


A 


RESET 


( RST2 
RST_SQ 


V+1_2V_D 
, V+3_3V_D 


LVDS 

TRANSMITTER 

PEG384B 

IC3401 


V+1_1V_D 

V+1_8V_D 

V+3_3V_D 


SUB-FILD CONV. 

& 

XY DRV SEQUENCE 
PATTERN GEN. 
PEG383B-K 
IC3301 


XSUS 


RESETX 


A 

_r 


LVDS 


LVDS 

Reciever 


Reciever 

IC3201 


IC3202 


A 


-1vds 


PDP-5010FD 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


33 



1 


2 


3 


4 


4.11 MAIN ASSY (DTV BLOCK DIAGRAM) 


To POD ASSY 
[CN4005/CN4006] 


A 

V 


7 ^ ^ 

r y [ ^ 


CIMaX sp2 


Logic 

flC7302] 


Circuit 


V 


VBI 


FLASH 

SLICER 

f •> 

32M 

[IC7001 1 


[IC6902 ] 


HSX_0 

’ 1 * 2 * 00 * * " 


SDRAM 

[IC6602] 

256Mbit 


SDRAM 1 

[IC6603] 

256Mbit • : 


SDRAM 

[IC6604] 

256Mbit 


o 

< •* 5 


SDRAM 

[IC6605] 

256Mbit 



To AV_SW 




^ SCLJW5 


I2CSW 



[IC6102] 

SDAJW5 




From EMMA2 


1 Chip System 1C 
BCM7038KPB1G-B2-K 
[IC6401] 


DVO 

[12bit] 


YUV(656) 

[8bit] 


J To ARIA 
] From VDEC 


] From AV_SW 


PDP-5010FD 


34 


1 


2 


3 


4 















5 


6 


7 


8 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


35 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


4.12 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of MAIN ASSY 


A 


C 


D 


E 

























5 


6 


7 


8 


A 



C 


D 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


37 


5 


6 


7 


8 













1 


2 


3 


4 


4.13 TANSHI ASSY 


A 


g TANSHI ASSY 



E 


F 


38 


PDP-501 OFD 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


4.14 50FHD LED and FHD IR ASSYS 





PDP-501 OFD 


A 


B 


C 


E 


F 


39 


5 


6 


7 


8 


Assvaod I I Assvoianv oi 



MAIN ASSY MAIN ASSY 


1 


2 


3 


4 


4.15 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK of FHD RLS and SIDE KEY ASSYS 


FHD RLS ASSY 




SIDE KEY ASSY 




o 

LO 

V+3_3V_STB 

KEY 




CD 


S9501 to S9507 




O 





L 




PDP-5010FD 


40 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


5. DIAGNOSIS 

5.1 POWER SUPPLY OPERATION 

5.1.1 LED DISPLAY INFORMATION 

■ LED Pattern 



c 


D 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


41 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


5.1.2 POWER ON SEQUENCE 


A 


C 


□ 


REM 

infrared 

receiver 


Side Keys 





Inv. Amp 
Q9731 


KEY_1 

KEY_2 


TXD_MD 

RXD_MD 

REQ_MD 



Inv. Amp 
Q8302 



— =(SR_OUT 

SR OUT Jack 
JA9404 






© :The remote control (or KEY) signal is input to the IF microcomputer. 

© :The IF microcomputer sends the operation data of the remote control unit (or KEY) to the main microcomputer. 
© :The main microcomputer issues a startup command (PON) to the MOD microcomputer. 

® : The relay is controlled with logical OR interpretation of control signals by the main microcomputer and 
module (MOD) microcomputer. 


E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


42 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


5.1.3 DETAILS OF POWER ON SEQUENCE 


A 


Power supply status - AC off 


ON 


OFF 



The state of AC cord is pulled out. 


Power supply status - Main switch off 


Microcomputer 
output port state 


IF: ACTIVE 

ON 

Main: PSW1 

OFF 

Module: RELAY 

OFF 

Module: DRF_B 

OFF 


Microcomputer 
input port state 


Main: RST4 

ON 

Main: RST2 

OFF 

Module: RST2 

OFF 



The user operation with the remote control unit is invalid. (All LED: OFF) 

Standby power device and some Vcc power devices operate. 

RGB-SW/AD/D-AMP/MAP are electrified, but uses the power-saving mode function of the 1C. 


PDP-5010FD 


43 






















1 


2 


3 


4 


A 


Power supply status - Standby 


Microcomputer 
output port state 


Microcomputer 
input port state 


ON ■ 


OFF ■ 


IF: ACTIVE 

ON 

Main: PSW1 

OFF 

Module: RELAY 

OFF 

Module: DRF_B 

OFF 


Main: RST4 

ON 

Main: RST2 

OFF 

Module: RST2 

OFF 


IR/Key/ 

232C 




Power supply 


IF ucom 


Short 


EEPROM 


| SW 


ACTIVE 


M0D_ 

h RST 


Main 


AC_DET 


Main_ 

ucom 


EEPROML 


Digital 


M_SW_DET 

M_SW_DET_B 


IS 


us_sw 


RST3 


RST4 


AND 


PDET 


DCDC/REG 


PSW1 


RST2 


DCDC/REG 


AND 


EMGJJSB 


DLNA/USB 

(Elite) 


VDEC 

HDMI 

ASIC 

LVDS-Tx 


I/O 


A.D.TUNER 

A.TUNER 

VBI 

BCM 

POD 

USB(Reg.) 


AV-SW 

FAN 


RGB-SW 

AD 


MAP 


D-AMP 


"pop 


Module_ 

ucom 


| BAK_EEP | 


Sensor 


X/Y Drive 


Scan 


DRIVE 






RELAY 


DCDC/REG 


RST2 


LVDS-Rx 

DAC 

SQ ASIC 


DRF_B 


AND 


| Address" 


- L| DCDC/REG \ 


J. 


ASIC 



ADDRESS 


L_ 





STB 


V+3.3V_STB 

V+5.1V_STB 


AC_ 

DET 


AC 

o 


Main 

Switch 


M_SW 

_DET 


Jumper j 

ED 


» | Relay 


Vcc 


Vsus 

Vadr 


V+35V 

V+16.5V 

V+12V 

V+6.5V 

V+5.1V 


DRIVE/SCAN 


Remote control unit waiting state. (Red LED: ON) 

Standby power device and some Vcc power devices operate. 

RGB-SW/AD/D-AMP/MAP are electrified, but uses the power-saving mode function of the 1C. 


Power supply status - ON 


Microcomputer 
output port state 


IF: ACTIVE 

ON 

Main: PSW1 

ON 

Module: RELAY 

ON 

Module: DRF_B 

ON 


Microcomputer 
input port state 


Main: RST4 

ON 

Main: RST2 

ON 

Module: RST2 

ON 



A state when it displays a picture on the PDP (Blue LED: ON) 
All devices are electrified. 


44 


PDP-5010FD 























5 


6 


7 


8 


5.2 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART OF FAILURE ANALYSIS 

5.2.1 WHOLE UNIT 


A 



PDP-501 OFD 


c 


D 


E 


F 


5 


6 


7 


8 















1 


2 


3 


4 


A 



D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


46 


1 


2 


3 


4 








5 


6 


7 


8 


5.2.2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 



A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


47 


5 


6 


7 


8 








1 


2 


3 


4 


5.2.3 DRIVE ASSY 



D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


48 


1 


2 


3 


4 






5 


6 


7 


8 


A 



C 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


49 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 



F 


50 


PDP-501 OFD 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


A 



In most cases of damage on one line, 
the panel chassis must be replaced. 



C 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


51 


5 


6 


7 


8 





1 


2 


3 


4 


5.2.4 DIGITAL ASSY 


A 


B 


C 



E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


52 


1 


2 


3 


4 






5 


6 


7 


8 


5.2.5 MAIN ASSY 



A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


53 


5 


6 


7 


8 







1 


2 


3 


4 


5.2.6 VIDEO SYSTEM 


A 


B 


C 


D 



F 


PDP-501 OFD 


54 


1 


2 


3 


4 












A 


Flowchart of Failure Analysis for The Video System 


No video from Composite or S-VIDEO 



c 


D 


• Waveforms 

Input signal: Color-bar 


® IC4601 - pins 85, 91,72 

V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 


® IC4601 - pin 42 (S-video) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 





IC4601 - pin 45 (Composite) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 

— ; i 1 1 


i-» 


ww Tf wvai r 

MI'IM 


) IC4801 - pin 22 (S-video) 

' V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 


) IC4601 - pin 45 (S-video) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 



® IC4601 - pin 49 (Composite) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 


© IC4801 - pin 70 (Composite) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 


© 


IC4801 - pin 22 (Composite) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 



® IC4801 - pin 26 (S-video) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 


PDP-5010FD 


55 


5 


6 


7 


8 






1 


2 


3 


4 


A 


No video from TV signal 



• Waveforms 

Input signal: Color-bar 







5 


6 


7 


8 


A 



• Waveforms 

Input signal: Color-bar 


) IC4701 - pin 30 (component_PR) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 



) IC4701 - pin 30 (PC_R) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 



(O) IC4701 - pin 32 (component_Pb) 

^ V: 500 mV/div H: 1 0 psec/div 



(JJ) IC4701 - pin 32 (PC_B) 


V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 



) IC4701 - pin 34 (component_Y) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 


) IC4701 - pin 34 (PC_G) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 


) IC5001 - pin 43 (component) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 


) IC5001 - pin 43 (PC) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 






© IC5001 - pin 48 (component) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 


(f^) IC5001 - pin 48 (PC) 

^ V: 500 mV/div H: 20 


) psec/div 


(fB) IC5001 - pin 54 (component) 

^ V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 


) IC5001 - pin 54 (PC) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 






PDP-5010FD 


57 




1 


2 


3 


4 


A 



D • Waveforms 

Input signal: Color-bar 


(0 IC4701 - pin 64 (PC_G) 

^ V: 500 mV/div H: 20 ps< 


psec/div 
amp 


"wwx‘a.i7'ftiv 


3) IC4701 - pin 30 (component_PR) 

^ V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 



i) IC4701 - pin 30 (PC_R) 

9 V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 

i — » . — i : 


(0 IC4701 - pin 32 (component_Pb) 

^ V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 




■i)»V«8l7TiW 


@ IC4701 - pin 32 (PC_B) 

V: 500 mV/div H:10ps< 


psec/div 


•w r iffXttiTYav 

»— lINNx 


© IC4701 - pin 66 (PC^B) 

V: 500 mV/div H:20ps< 


psec/div 
Map 


"VWIwr»7KV T y» 


) IC4701 - pin 34 (component_Y) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 

■ M a t . i z . — i ,nm p 


| IC4701 - pin 34 (PC_G) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 


(0 IC5001 - pin 43 (component) 

^ V: 500 mV/div H: 10 psec/div 


(0 IC5001 - pin 43 (PC) 

^ V: 500 mV/div H:10 





psec/div 

amp 




(0 IC4701 - pin 68 (PC^R) 

^ V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 


© IC5001 - pin 48 (component) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 1 0 psec/div 


- a ur g ~ a 


\ \ 




© IC5001 - pin 48 (PC) 

V: 500 mV/div H:20 

t m ; l 


psec/div 

amp 


) IC5001 - pin 54 (component) 

V: 500 mV/div H: 20 psec/div 


(0) IC5001 - pin 54 (PC) 

^ V: 500 mV/div H: 20 


) psec/div 


—•nrerv7sr>-i»~ 






58 


PDP-501 0FD 


1 


2 


3 


4 






5 


6 


7 


8 


A 



No video from USB input 



PDP-501 OFD 


59 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


5.2.7 AUDIO SYSTEM 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 









5 


6 


7 


8 



C 


• Waveforms 

Input signal: L/R 1 kHz, 0.5 Vrms (VOL 30) 



F 


PDP-501 OFD 


61 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 



• Waveforms 

Input signal: L/R 1 kHz, 0.5 Vrms (VOL 30) 



(S&IC9101 - pin 107 

V: 1 V/div H: 10 pS/div 



(§^IC9101 - pin 108 

W V:1 V/div H: 10 pS/div 



PDP-501 OFD 


62 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


5.3 DIAGNOSIS OF PD (POWER-DOWN) 

5.3.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER-DOWN SIGNAL 


A 

■ Block Diagram of the Power-Down Signal 







O 




0 

5 



o 

o 



E 

o 



=3 

0 

0 






0 




X_ 

Q. 

U 


0 

C 

O) 


CO 

0 

C 


U 

T3 

0 

o 

c 

o 



0 

1_L 


© 

.£= 

0 

0 



0 




M— 

O 


© 

Q 

LU 

o 

0 


0 

0 

_l 




0 







o: 


0 

Q) 

O 

0 

sz 

0 

0 

E 

0 

o 

2 

H 


o 


r 


z> 

0. 

0. 

z> 

CO 

DC 

LJJ 

£ 

o 

CL 


>, 2 
co i; 

CD 5 


c 


o 


"o 


C 1 ) 

13 

o 

p 

CL 

o 


i 

J 



c 


D 


E 


F 


63 










1 


2 


3 


4 


5.3.2 PD (POWER-DOWN) DIAGNOSIS OF FAILURE ANALYSIS 


■ Prediction of failure symptoms when a PD (power-down) is generated 


Red LED 
Flashing 
Count 

Operating 

PD 

Defective Assy 

PD Outline 

Checkpoint 

Possible Defective Part 

Remarks 



POWER SUPPLY Unit 

Failure in the POWER SUPPLY Unit 



2 

POWER 

X DRIVE Assy 

VSUS UVP 

X SUS BLOCK 

Q1219 to Q1224 

VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT- 
SUSGND are short-circuited. 



Y DRIVE Assy 

Y SUS BLOCK 

Q2217 to Q2224 

VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT- 
SUSGND are short-circuited. 



SCAN Assy 


SCAN 1C 

SCAN 1C 




X DRIVE Assy 

VH UVP 

X SUS BLOCK 

Q1218 to 01224,01226 

VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT- 
SUSGND are short-circuited. 

3 

SCAN 

Y DRIVE Assy 

Y SUS BLOCK 

Q2217 to Q2224 

VSUS-SUSOUT and SUSOUT- 
SUSGND are short-circuited. 




VH DC/DC converter 

IC2601 ,IC2603,D2604 





Connectors 

disconnection 

detection 

CN2001,CN2301 





DIGITAL Assy 

CN3509 





SCAN Assy 

Connectors 

disconnection detection 

CN2801 ,CN2901 ,CN2902,CN3001 , 
CN3002,CN3101 



4 

SCN-5V 


IC5V UVP 

SCAN 1C 

SCAN 1C 




Y DRIVE Assy 

IC5V DC/DC 

Q2764,D2768,R2764 





VNOFS UVP 

Y MSK BLOCK 

Q2320 to 02325,02330, 02332,02334 

LMSK is short-circuited. 





VNOFS DC/DC 

D2606, 02709,02710 





Vprst UVP 

YPRST Regulator 

02604,02605, IC2602 





15VDD UVP 

1 5VDC/DC 

Q2662.R2669 



Y-DCDC 

Y DRIVE Assy 

VKOFS1_2 UVP 

Y MSK BLOCK 

Q2320 to 02325,02330, 02332,02334 

LMSK is short-circuited. 



VKOFS1_2 Regulator 

02705,02702 





VKOFS3 UVP 

Y MSK BLOCK 

Q2320 to 02325,02330, 02332,02334 

LMSK is short-circuited. 





VKOFS3 Regulator 

02706,02703 





VKOFS4 UVP 

Y MSK BLOCK 

Q2320 to 02325,02330, 02332,02334 

LMSK is short-circuited. 





VKOFS4 Regulator 

02707,02704 


7 

Y-SUS 

Y DRIVE Assy 

Center electric potential 
detection PD 

Y RESONANCE BLOCK 

Q21 06 to Q21 09,021 1 1 ,Q21 1 3, 
D2104 to D2107 





VADR UVP 

ADDRESS RESONACE BLOCK 





ADDRESS Assy 

VADR UVP 

TCP 



8 

ADRS 



CN1601 ,CN1602,CN1801 ,CN1802 




DIGITAL Assy 

Connectors 

disconnection 

CN3501 to CN3508 





X DRIVE Assy 

detection 

CN1202 to CN1206 





Y DRIVE Assy 


CN2302 to CN2306 



9 

XDRIVE 

X DRIVE Assy 

Connectors 

CN1001 



DIGITAL Assy 

detection 

CN3510 






Connectors 

disconnection detection 

CN1201 






15VDD UVP 

X SUS BLOCK 

L1201.R1217 





1 5VDC/DC 

Q1402 


10 

X-DCDC 

X DRIVE Assy 

VXKOFS1 UVP 

VXKOFS1 Regulator 

01405,01406 





X OFFSET BLOCK 

01302,01304 





VXKOFS2 UVP 

VXKOFS2 Regulator 

01403,01404 





X OFFSET BLOCK 

01301,01303 


11 

X-SUS 

X DRIVE Assy 

Center electric potential 
detection PD 

X RESONANCE BLOCK 

01108,01116, 01112,01119 


12 

DIG-DCDC 

DIGITAL Assy 

3.3V, 2.5V, 1.1V 

Abnormality in the DC-DC converter 
control 1C 

IC3801 





UVP, OVP, OCP 

Periphery of the DC-DC converter 

Q3841 , Q3861 , Q3881 
L3841 , L3861 , L3881 
R3820, R3848, R3868, R3888 





5.1V OCP 

Abnormality in 5.1V input 

(include abnormality in the protection fuse) 

FU3801 




POWER SUPPLY Unit 

Connectors 

disconnection detection 

P4 


EXT_PD line: Open 

15 

UNKNOW 


Connectors 

disconnection detection 

CN3801 


EXT_PD line: Open 



DIGITAL Assy 

ModuleUcom can not 
detection 

Each PD line of ModuleUcom 


It becomes "UNKNOW" except 
above-mentioned PD detection 
condition. 


UVP: Under Voltage Protect , OVP: Over Voltage Protect 


64 


PDP-5010FD 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


■ How to distinguish which connector is disconnected 


Assy 

Connector 

To which Assy the Connector 
is Connected 

LED Flashing Count 

Screen Display 

X DRIVE Assy 

CN1001 

DIGITAL Assy 

5 (XDRIVE) 


CN1201 

POWER SUPPLY Unit (drive system power) 


Black screen 

CN1202 

POWER SUPPLY Unit (ADR system power) 

8 (ADRS) 


CN1203 

ADDRESS Assy 

8 (ADRS) 


Y DRIVE Assy 

CN2001 

DIGITAL Assy 

3 (SCAN) 


CN2301 

POWER SUPPLY Unit (drive system power) 

3 (SCAN) 


CN2302 

POWER SUPPLY Unit (ADR system power) 

8 (ADR) 


CN2303 to 
CN2306 

ADDRESS Assy 

8 (ADR) 


CN2501 , 
CN2502 

SCAN A, B, C, D Assy 

4 (SCN-5V) 


SCAN A, B, C, D 
Assy 

CN2901, CN3001 

Y DRIVE Assy 

4 (SCN-5V) 


CN2801 , CN2902 
CN3002, CN3101 

SCAN A, B, C, D Assy 

ADDRESS Assy 

CN1602, CN1802 

DIGITAL Assy 

8 (ADRS) 


CN1601, CN1801 

X DRIVE Assy, 
Y DRIVE Assy 

8 (ADRS) 



c 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


65 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 



B 


X„CN | > - 


\ > XDRV_PD 



FFC 

disconnection | 
detection 


-| > YDRV_PD 


15VDD 


VKOFS3 
VKOFS4 

VPRST 



VH C> 


Increase or decrease 
voltage detection 


-| > SCAN_PD 


66 


PDP-5010FD 



5 


6 


5.4 DIAGNOSIS OF SD (SHUTDOWN) 

5.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE SHUTDOWN SIGNAL 



A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


67 


5 


6 



1 


2 


3 


4 


5.4.2 SD (SHUTDOWN) DIAGNOSIS 


as as 

-C 3 

0 1 
O 0 
cr _c 

6i = 

LU > 0 

03 0 
0 P 


(0 O 

2 O 


5 T 3 

0 

■D C' 

1 E 

OT 0 

< E 


o 


E< 
g .32 m 

■§§ 


>.LU 


O) o 

13 92 


a> o_ 
n 


0 

Q 

£ 03 


CD q 
■Q =3 
E cr 


® to 

-C Q) 

O -D 


o 

o 


_ E 
E 


CD 

Z> 

(/) 


O : 
C/3 I 


o 

6 


1 1 

0 o 


0 $ 
o 1 


0 o 

O I 
g 1 


0 nS 
£ 2 
■+r D- O 
° ^ c 

o>< -2 
c t ns 
it; Q 0 

1 »a 

‘o 0 5 

+L. 0 

o 0 E 

03 wS 


£ 

> fn 


=1 O 

E o 


c 

-O m 


$ ~ 
m 8 
: 0 ^ 
• ^ E 

‘ c 

E | 


> g. 
§ I 
yi § 


: a 


: O 


£ 1 e 

f If 


68 


PDP-501 OFD 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


£ 

0) 

cc 


a> q. 
n 


CO 

3 

</) 


< 

2 


cm < 
o ^ 

CO Q 

o ° 

y q_ 


C/D 

< 

CJ 











p 









a5 

b 








c 

o 

o 

CM 







o 

.o 

CO 

s 





> 


l_ 

3 

.£2 

>2 





0 

CD 

b 

E 

o 

o 

> 

co 

CO 

o 

fx 

CD 

o 

a3 

c 

LL 

■a 

CO 

5 

o 

c/5 

m 

o 

CE 

Q_ 

LU 

a> 

’3 

CD 

CO 

CD 

CD 

E 

0 

$ 

CD 

T3 

•a 

a 

cn 


O 

> 

LU 

1- 

_L 



o 


a O 
> Q 

■r- Q 

™ y 1 


cr 


PDP-5010FD 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


69 



1 


2 


3 


4 


5.5 NON-FAILURE INFORMATION 

5.5.1 INFORMATION ON SYMPTOMS THAT DO NOT CONSTITUTE FAILURE 


■ Information on symptoms that do not constitute failure 


Symptom 

Cause, item to check, information 

HDMI: Symptoms concerning the input format and settings 

The picture color for an INPUT 4 to 7 signal is not correct. 

The color setting for INPUT 4 to 7 is not compatible with that of the output equipment. 
Check whether the color setting is YPbPr or RGB. 

The video signal to INPUT 4 to 7 is not displayed, and a 
message is displayed. 

A unsupported video signal is input. 

The audio signal input to the INPUT 4 to 5 is not output. 
No HDMI signal is input. 

The audio setting for INPUT 4 to 5 is any setting and a video signal is not input. If the audio 
setting is any setting to output an analog audio signal, the HDMI signal must be input. (If a DVI 
device is to be connected, use a DVI-HDMI conversion cable.) If the HDMI video signal is not 
input, the analog audio signal is not output. 

No sound of signals to INPUT 4 to 7 is output. 

The setting on the side of the HDMI output equipment is wrong. 
Example: Dolby Digital 

The 1080p input signal is not displayed properly or at all, 
although the 1080i input signal is displayed properly. 

Check that the connected cable supports HDMI Category 2. (As the clock frequency for the 1 080p 
signal is triple that for the 1 080i signal, signal degradation caused by a cable must not be 
neglected. A cable supporting HDMI Category 2 can be used for the 1080p signal. Although some 
conventional cables can support the 1080p signal, some others cannot.) 

DIGITAL OUT 

Playback of the signal from the DIGITAL audio output 
connector is possible, but recording is not possible. 

The video signal output from the DIGITAL connector is copy-protected. 

Miscellaneous 

The no-signal off function is not activated. 

The no-signal off and no-operation off functions are effective only if video (composite, S video, 
component, HDMI [excluding PC]) input or TV input is selected. 

The no-operation off function is not activated. 

Power management does not function. 

Power Management is effective only while an analog PC signal is being input. It is not effective 
with HDMI-PC signal input. 

The AUTO SETUP function is not activated. 

The Auto Setup function is effective only while an analog PC signal is being input. This function 
does not work if an analog PC signal is not input, even if the INPUT PC is selected. 

Control via the SR connector is not possible. 

Wrong connection of the cable to the PC INPUT (AUDIO) connector is suspected. 

The audio signal from the PC is not output. 

Wrong connection of the cable to the SR connector is suspected. 

The picture-quality setting (AV Selection) is not stored. 

The picture-quality setting is stored for each input. As the setting is changed when another input 
is selected, the user may have a false idea that the setting is not stored. 

The picture size changes arbitrary. 

The Auto Size setting is set to ON. 

The display position of the screen changes slightly while the 
screen is on. 

The orbiter function for minimizing the effects of phosphor burn is activated. Although the setting 
for this function can be changed on the Home menu, retaining the factory setting is strongly 
recommended. 

The video signal to the S video connector is not displayed. 

The component video cable is connected to the same input function as for the S video (even if no 
signal is input to the component video connector, merely having something plugged in to the 
connector will result in judgment that a signal is being fed in and the component video connector 
takes priority). (Priority of connectors: component video > S video > composite video) 

The video signal to the composite video connector is not 
displayed. 

The S Video or component video cable is connected to the same input function as for the 
composite video. (Priority of connectors: component video > S video > composite video) 


SUPPLEMENT: On the video setting for HDMI 

There are three types of HDMI output formats: color difference 4:4:4, color difference 4:2:2, and RGB4:4:4. 

E (The proportions, such as 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, represent those of the amount of data for video signal components. For example, as for color difference 4:4:4, the 
proportion of the amount of data as for Y, Cb, and Cr is 4:4:4.) 

It is required to make the settings of the PDP according to the settings of the output equipment. For usual operation, however, set them to AUTO. If the color is 
inappropriate, make the settings manually. 

In the HDMI system, video signals are coded at 24 bits per pixel and transmitted as a series of 24-bit pixels. In a case of color difference 4:4:4, Y, Cb, and Cr use 8 
bits each. In a case of color difference 4:2:2, Y, Cb, and Cr use 12 bits each, but Cb and Cr are transmitted at a half sampling rate of Y. This unit is capable of 
processing the upper 10 bits out of 12 bits of video data. Recent high-end DVD players, such as Pioneer DV-79AVi, are capable of outputting 10-bit color-difference 
I signals. In general, it is said that picture quality for color difference 4:2:2 format is assumed to be higher, because human eyes are more sensitive to luminance 
than to colors. In the case of RGB4:4:4, R, G, and B use 8 bits each. 


PDP-5010FD 


70 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


5.5.1. 1 CONFIRMATION ON THE HDMI CONTROL FUNCTION 


When you use the HDMI Control (HDMI-CEC) function, if the unit does not function properly, such as not being able to control 
or recognize connected equipment, check the following: 

• Confirmation of the manufacturer of the connected equipment 

Check if the connected equipment was manufactured by Pioneer and if it supports the HDMI Control function. 

If its manufacturer is not Pioneer, proper operations are not guaranteed. 

• Confirmation of connections 

Check if the unit is connected properly, as shown in the figures below: 

(For details, refer to "Making the HDMI Control connections" in the Operating instructions.) 



Example 1 : When an A V amplifier that supports 
HDMI Control is connected 



Example 2: When an AV amplifier that does 
not support HDMI Control is connected 


^ s gm) 



BD player 


Example 3: When an AV amplifier 
is not connected 



D 


Check that the following conditions are met: 

• The connected equipment must support the HDMI Control function. 

• The equipment must be connected to the INPUT connector that has been selected in "Input Setting" on the HDMI Control 
Setting menu. 

• The connections must be made properly, as shown in the above figures (in a case where an AV device, such as an AV 
amplifier, and a DVD recorder/BD player are connected, in a case where only a DVD recorder/BD player is connected, 
and in a case where an AV device, such as an AV amplifier, which does not support HDMI-CEC, is connected). 

• When an AV device that supports the HDMI Control function is connected, it must be connected between the PDP and a 
DVD recorder/BD player. 

• The HDMI Control function must be activated on the connected equipment (DVD recorder, BD player, AV device 
[AV amplifier, etc.]). (Refer to the Operating instructions of the connected equipment.) 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


• Confirmation of the number of connected devices 

Check that the number of connected devices does not 
exceed the maximum number for guaranteed operations. 


Equipment 

Maximun 

Number 

DVD recorder 

2 

BD player 

2 

AV System 

1 


• Confirmation of settings 

Check that the settings for the HDMI Control function are 
properly made. (For details, refer to "Setting the HDMI 
Control" in the Operating instructions.) 

| Check that the following conditions are met: 

• "Input Setting" on the HDMI Control Setting menu must 
be set to the same input as that to which the equipment 
that supports the HDMI Control function is connected. 

• When Power Off Control, Power-On Ready, or Hold 
Sound Status are to be used, their settings must be On. 

c 

• Confirmation of operations 

Check that the HDMI Control function works properly. 

(1) Connect a device that supports the HDMI Control 
function. 

I 

(2) Perform the procedures that are required after changing 
connections, which are described in "Making the HDMI 
Control connections" in the Operating instructions. 

1 Turn on the plasma television and all the connected 
devices. 

D 2 Confirm that the setting in “Input Setting” for “HDMI 
Control Setting” is properly entered according to the 
connected devices. Also confirm the HDMI Control 
related settings in the connected devices. 

3 Switch to the HDMI input terminals to which the 
devices are connected to check if audio and video 

* images are properly output and displayed. 

4 Try turning off the plasma television, then turn the 
power back on to the plasma television. 

(3) Perform "Power On Test" or "Power Off Test" on the 
HDMI Control Setting menu. (For details, refer to "Power 

E On/Off Test" in the Operating instructions.) 

If the following occurs even if the operation check is 
performed properly, a failure, such as breakage of the HDMI 
cable, problems on the side of the connected device, and 
problems with the MAIN Assy, may be suspected: 

B • "Power On Test" or "Power Off Test" cannot be selected 
(the items are grayed) 

• The connected device cannot be turned on/off. 

In some cases, an operation check using another HDMI 
input connector may be required in order to narrow down the 
F cause. 


PDP-5010FD 


72 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


5.5.2 FUNCTION OF DECREASING THE BRIGHTNESS LEVEL 


■ High-temperature protection function 1 

If the panel temperature (TEMPI ) reaches 80 °C, the limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually 
decreased to lower the temperature of the panel. 

• This function is activated based on the TEMPI temperature. 

• The limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be decreased 8 per 5 seconds. 

• The lowest limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge is about 700. 

• The maximum count of plasma discharge will begin to increase gradually if the panel temperature falls to the specified 
temperature. 

■ High-temperature protection function 2 

If the panel temperature (TEMPI ) reaches 55 °C, the plasma-discharge count that is determined based on the input APL will 
be decreased. In actual operation, the ABL adjustment value will be offset. 

• This function is activated based on the TEMPI temperature. 

• The ABL adjustment value will be decreased by one step per 30 seconds. 

•The ABL adjustment value will begin to increase gradually if the panel temperature falls to the specified temperature. 


■ Panel protection function 1 (protection against still picture) 

If a still picture is displayed for 3 minutes or more, the limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually 

decreased to minimize the effects of phosphor burn. 

• This function is activated after detection if the displayed picture is still (the picture will be considered to be still if only the 
mouse cursor is moved). 

• The limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge will be decreased 8 per 5 seconds. 

• The lowest limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge is about 700 (it takes about 15 minutes to reach the lowest limit, 
although the required time varies depending on the displayed picture). 

• The maximum count of plasma discharge will begin to increase gradually if the displayed picture is changed to animated 
picture. 

Note: How to decrease the brightness level in this function is the same as in high-temperature protection function 1. 


■ Panel protection function 2 (SCAN 1C protection) 

If a particular load is applied to the SCAN 1C, the limit for the 
maximum count of plasma discharge will be gradually decreased. 
Note: How to decrease the brightness level in this function is the 
same as in high-temperature protection function 1. 


■ Panel protection function 3 
(protection against panel cracking) 

A bright window, as shown in the figure on the right, on the screen 
increases the heat of the panel. If such a pattern is recognized on 
the screen, the limit for the maximum count of plasma discharge 
will be gradually decreased. 

Note: How to decrease the brightness level in this function is the 
same as in high-temperature protection function 1 . 




High-temperature protection function 1/ 
panel protection functions 1, 2, and 3 

High-temperature protection function 1/panel 
protection: The limit for the maximum count 
of plasma discharge will be gradually 
decreased if the panel temperature reaches 
80 °C. 




Detection example: Protection against panel cracking 


High-temperature protection function 2 

The count of plasma discharge with regard to the APL will be 
decreased if the panel temperature becomes 55 °C or higher. 


E 


F 


APL (average picture level) 


PDP-501 0FD 


73 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


5.6 OUTLINE OF THE OPERATION 

5.6.1 PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF FUNCTION 


Function: 

It is an operational mode where the digital signal processing performs circuit operation but the power is not supplied to the 
panel driving system (Vsus, VAddress) in order to avoid a power down (PD). 

Application: 

1 . When it is necessary to check whether the signal output is correctly reaching the drive system in a repairing activity etc. 

2. In the case of a PD, to determine whether the problem is with the panel drive-power supply or with the other system power 
supply. 

Method: 

1. Short-circuit between the specified location of the POWER SUPPLY Unit and GND (Multi base section recommended), 
using a jumper with alligator clips (refer to the photos below). 

2. Execute [DRV S00] by RS-232C command. ([DRV SOI] for release) 

Supplemental explanation: 

• When the panel drive-power is in OFF state, there will be no PD, except PS_PD, as the PD signal has been muted. 

• If the clip is removed in the OFF state of the panel drive-power, PD will take place at the instance of clip removal. 

Therefore, be sure to remove the clip after turning the power OFF. 

• Under RS-232C command control, [DRV SOI] (release) is possible during power ON. Flowever, there is a possibility of 
damaging the set. Therefore, make this operation only after turning the power OFF. 

• Command [DRV S00/S01] is effective even during standby. 

• When the main power switch is set to OFF, no command is accepted. 

• When the AC power cord is unplugged, the panel drive-power OFF state established by the [DRV S00] command is 
canceled. (The panel drive-power OFF state remains in effect even if the main power switch is set to OFF after that 
command is sent.) 


When the panel drive-power is ON When the panel drive-power is OFF 



PDP-5010FD 


74 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


5.6.2 SPECIFICATION OF THE FAN CONTROL 


■ Block diagram 

The internal fan cools down the MTB and Power blocks. 
The external fans cool down the whole unit. 


Internal fan External fans 



A 


B 



Notes: 

• The operating temperature of the fan is higher than the ambient temperature, because the sensor temperature is read by 
the microcomputer. 

• If the critical values for signals are displayed in the address circuit, the fan may be activated or be rotated at higher speed f 
in response to values lower than the set temperature values shown above. 

• When the temperature rises, the sensor voltage of TEMP2 decreases. 

• When the voltage of the DAC output for external FAN decreases, rotation speed of FAN rises. 

PDP-5010FD 75 

■ 5 « 6 « 7 « 8 " 











1 


2 


3 


4 


5.6.3 PROCESSING IN ABNORMALITY 


A 


Protection of the Power Amplifier 

• Circuit configuration 



• Specifications for port monitoring 


Port Name 

SD/PD Indication 

Active 

Monitoring conditions 

Operation 

A_NG_B 

AUDIO 

Shutdown occurs when the signal is "L." 
30 mS * 3 times 

RST4 = "H" (always) 
(Monitoring starts 2 sec 
after the above conditions 
are established.) 

The main CPU operations described below will be 
performed when either "A_NG_B = L" or "OTW = L" is 
detected (established) under the monitoring conditions. 

OTW 

AUDIO 

Shutdown occurs when the signal is "L." 
130mS*3times 


• Operation specifications of the main CPU 

(1) When a shutdown decision is made by the main CPU 

• After a warning indication is displayed for 5 sec, a shutdown is generated (the blue LED flashes 5 times). 

• A warning indication is displayed for all input-signal types. 

• Example of a warning indication: "The speaker terminals are short-circuited. After reconnection, turn the unit on again." 
(For 50-inch models) (For 42-inch models, an indication declaring a forced power-off is displayed.) 

(2) Display conditions 

When the panel is on: A warning indication is displayed immediately. 

When the panel is off: A warning indication is not displayed immediately but is displayed when the panel is turned on. 
Note: A warning indication is displayed each time the panel is turned on if the conditions for a shutdown persist. 

• Conditions for resetting the circuits 

The circuits will be reset upon Standby ON/OFF. 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


76 


1 


2 


3 


4 



A 


Power supply and DC-DC converter 


• Circuit configuration 



c 


• Specifications for port monitoring 


Port Name 

SD/PD Indication 

Active 

Monitoring conditions 

Operation 

RST2 

ASIC power 
(M-DCDC) 

Shutdown occurs when the 
signal is "L." 

for 5 sec after PSW1 is ON. 
or 

for 2 sec while the unit is 
ON. 

• Panel ON (RST4 = H and 
PSW1 = L) 

• While awaiting restoration 
of RST2 (RST2 = L) 

The SD timer starts when "RST2 = L" is detected under 
monitoring conditions. If "RST3 = H," "M_SW_DETJ3 = H," or 
"RST4 = L" is detected, or if a power-down or shutdown in the 
module microcomputer system is not generated, the unit waits 
for 30 mS. Then, if the SD timer continues to count for 2 sec 
or more, a shutdown is determined, and a shutdown process 
starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 13 times) 
starts. The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared 
upon the next power-on. 

If RST2 is H, a restoration process starts according to the 
latest power-on/-off status. 

RST3 

AC power 

AC OFF when the signal is 
"H." 

• Active STB (including SD/PD 
statuses) 

• Functional STB 

• Panel ON 

• (Areas other than North America) 
While the main power switch is 
set to OFF (M_SW„DET_B = H) 

• (North America) While the main 
power switch is set to OFF 
(M_SWJ3ET_B = H) 

• While awaiting restoration of AC 
power (RST3 = H) 

• While awaiting restoration of 
RST2 (RST2 = L) 

• While awaiting restoration of 
RST4 (RST4 = L) 

If "RST3 = H" (AC_OFF) is detected under the 
monitoring conditions, a power-off process starts. 
Monitoring of the RST3 port is continued, while 
monitoring of other ports is interrupted. 
Communication is controlled only by the IF 
microcomputer. The port outputs are set as specified. 
If the signal at the RST3 port continues to be H after 
30 mS of waiting, monitoring is continued. 

If RST3 is L, a restoration process starts according to 
the latest power-on/-off status. 

RST4 

MAIN power 
(RELAY) 

Shutdown occurs if the 

signal is "L." 

for 5 sec after RELAY is 

ON. 

or 

for 2 sec while the unit is 
ON or in Functional STB. 

• Functional STB 

• Panel ON 

• (Areas other than North America) 
While the main power switch is 
set to OFF (M_SW_DET_B = H) 

• While awaiting restoration of 
RST2 (RST2 = L) 

• While awaiting restoration of 
RST4 (RST4 = L) 

The SD timer starts when "RST4 = L" (power-off of 
devices in the functional STB system) is detected under 
monitoring conditions. 

The RST4 initialization process starts, and input 
monitoring, communication setting, and output-terminal 
setting are performed. 

The RST4-SD timer starts. If either "RST3 = H" or 
"M_SW_DET_B = H" is detected, or if a power-down or 
shutdown in the module microcomputer system is not 
generated, the unit waits for 30 mS. Then, if the SD 
timer continues to count for 2 sec or more, a shutdown 
is determined, and a shutdown process starts. 

A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 13 times) starts. 
The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared 
upon the next power-on. 

If RST4 is H, a restoration process starts according to 
the latest power-on/-off status. 


PDP-501 OFD 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


A 

Fan and temperature sensor 


• Circuit configuration 



I • Specifications for port monitoring 


Port Name 

SD/PD Indication 

Active 

Monitoring conditions 

Operation 

FAN_NG1 

FAN1 

Shutdown occurs when 
the signal is "H." 

1 S * 3 times 

RST4 = H and FANJDN1 = H 
(Monitoring starts 3 sec after the 
above conditions are established.) 

If FAN_NG1 (for details on detection logic, see "File of 
fan-control specifications") is detected (established) under the 
monitoring conditions, a shutdown process starts. A specific 
LED flash pattern (blue LED, 10 times) starts. 

The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon 
the next power-on. 

FAN_NG2 

FAN 

Shutdown occurs when 
the signal is "H." 

1 S * 3 times 

RST4 = H and FAN_ON2 = H 
(Monitoring starts 3 sec after the 
above conditions are established.) 

If FAN_NG2 (for details on detection logic, see "File of 
fan-control specifications") is detected (established) under the 
monitoring conditions, a shutdown process starts. A specific 
LED flash pattern (blue LED, 10 times) starts. 

The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared upon 
the next power-on. 

TEMP2 

High temperature at 
MTB 

Shutdown occurs if any 
values equal to or 
greater than minimum to 
require a shutdown are 
detected. 

1 S * 3 times 

RST4 = H 

(Monitoring starts 1 sec after the 
above conditions are established.) 

If any values equal to or greater than minimum to 
require a shutdown are detected (established) under 
the monitoring conditions, a warning indication will be 
displayed for 30 sec, after which a shutdown process 
starts. A specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 1 1 times) 
starts. 

The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared 
upon the next power-on. 

TMP_NG 

High temperature in 
the drive circuits 

Shutdown occurs if any 
values equal to or 
greater than minimum to 
require a shutdown are 
detected. 

200 mS * 5 times 
(average) 

Digital video RST2 = FI 

If any values equal to or greater than minimum to 
require a shutdown is detected (established) under the 
monitoring conditions, those changes in status will be 
transmitted to the main microcomputer via the UART. 
Upon receiving the data, a warning indication will be 
displayed for 30 sec, after which a shutdown process 
starts. The main microcomputer orders a specific LED 
flash pattern (blue LED, 4 times). 

The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared 
upon the next power-on. 


Low temperature in 
the drive circuits 



If any values equal to or greater than minimum to 
require a shutdown is detected (established) under the 
monitoring conditions, those changes in status will be 
transmitted to the main microcomputer via the UART. 
Upon receiving the data, the main microcomputer 
orders a specific LED flash pattern (blue LED, 4 times). 
The next PON operation is valid, and the flag is cleared 
upon the next power-on. 


PDP-5010FD 


78 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


5.6.4 TRAP SWITCH 


• Outline and Notes 

For video data transmission inside this Plasma Display, digital signals are used. Therefore, this unit adopts the HDCP 
(High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) system for copyright protection. This unit is also provided with a detection switch 
(TRAP switch) that will prohibit the unit from being turned on again "if the rear case of the unit is accidentally opened," in order 
to prevent the panel technology from being leaked out. 

The TRAP switch is disabled while the unit is turned off. 

When performing internal diagnosis of the PDP, fix the switch to the OFF position using adhesive tape before turning on the 
unit. After servicing, be sure to remove the adhesive tape. 



WHEN THE TRAP SWITCH IS ACTIVATED 

When the TRAP switch is activated, the red and blue LEDs will light. 

In order to deactivate the TRAP switch, close the upper plate of the unit or fix the TRAP switch to the OFF position in the 
manner described above. 

Then, follow procedures (1) or (2) below: 

(1) Deactivating with the remote control unit 

• Enter Factory mode. 

• Proceed to the INITIALIZE layer of Factory mode. Hold the DISPLAY key pressed for more than 5 seconds. 

(2) Deactivating with the RS-232C command 

• Send the CTM (cancel) command. 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


79 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


6. SERVICE FACTORY MODE 

6.1 OUTLINE OF THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE 

A Operations during Service Factory mode are described here. 


6.1.1 SERVICE FACTORY MODE TRANSITION CHART 


Standby mode 


POWER 

[POF] 


Power supply ON mode 


FACT 

[FAY] 


FACT 

HOME MENU 
[FAN] 


• The function is changed. 
•The signal mode is changed. 



INFORMATION 
(MTB INFORMATION) 






£ 


PANEL FACTORY 


5 


OPTION 


£ 


INITIALIZE 


Effective IR in Factory mode 


RS-232C Factory mode 


[ (MUTING)] 


Effective 232C 
command in Factory mode 


o 


6.1.2 HOW TO ENTER/EXIT SERVICE FACTORY MODE 


■ How to enter Service Factory Mode 

By using a PDP service remote control) 

• PDP service remote control : Press [FACTORY] key. 

By issuing RS-232C commands ) 

• During normal Standby mode : Issue [PON] then [FAY]. 

• During normal operation mode : Issue [FAY], 

■ How to exit Service Factory Mode 

By using a PDP service remote control) 

• PDP service remote control : press [FACTORY] key. 

• Supplied remote control unit : press [HOME MENU] key. 
By issuing RS-232C commands) 

• Issue [FAN], 


■ How to enter Service Factory Mode by Using the 
supplied Remote Control Unit 

• Same as previous model. Please refer to the technical document 
(Service Know-how). 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


80 


i 


2 


3 


4 




5 


6 


7 


8 


6.1.3 FUNCTIONS WHEN ENTERING THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE 


■ Fuctions whose setting are set to OFF 

The settings for the following functions are set to OFF when Service Factory mode is entered 
(including when the “FAY” command is received) : 


Function 

Remarks 

2-Screen Operation 

Input function set on the main side is selected. 

FREEZE 


Auto size, Side Mask 

It is not performed during Factory mode. 

ORBITER, Mask control 

Central value operation (ORBITER) 

Sleep Timer 

Cancel the operation. 

Room light sensor 

Turn off the detecting operation (Setting data will be retained.) 

Blue LED dimmer 

Turn off the operation (Setting data will be retained.) 

Detection of the TRAP switch 

The detection operation is stopped. 

TRAP history 

To a possible turning on though the memory is maintained. 

Display of TV guide 

Finish the TV-GUIDE function. 

Setting of Parental Control 

When this is turned off, the block of the screen is released. 

Power Control 

Turn off the operation (However, the setting maintains it.) 

Image Position 

Central value operation 


Note: Enter the factory after cancelling ACI because the ACI operation setting OFF and not done. 


c 


■ User data 

User data will be treated as follows : 


• User data on picture-quality and audio-quality adjustments are not reflected, and factory-preset data are output 

(user data will be retained in memory). When the unit enters Service Factory mode, the current audio-quality adjustment | 
data will be still be retained in memory. 

• User-setting data will be applied to the various settings (items on the menus), signal formats, and the items that are 
associated with path change (HDMI settings, etc.). 

• Data on screen (i.e., screen position; meaning clock dividers, and not including data on screen size). 

Are reset to the default values (data stored in memory will be retained). 

Screen size will be retained. d 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


81 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


6.1.4 REMOTE CONTROL CODE IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE 


Remote Control Keys 

Basic Functions 

Remarks 

MUTING 

Switching the main items. 

Shifting to the next main item (top). 

4- (DOWN) 

Switching the subtitled items. 

Shifting downward to the next subtitiled item. 

t (UP) 

Switching the subtitled items. 

Shifting upward to the next upper layer. 

<- (LEFT) 

Decreasing the adjustment value. 

Decreasing the adjustment value. 

-► (RIGHT) 

Increasing the adjustment value. 

Increasing the adjustment value. 

ENTER/SET 

Switching the layers. 

Shifting downward or upward to the next lower or upper layer. 

INPUT 

Selecting INPUT. 

Shifting the INPUT to the next function. 

INPUTxx 

Selecting INPUT. 

Switching the INPUT to xx. (xx=1 to 7 etc) 

CH+/P+ 

Increasing the channel number. 


CH-/P- 

Decreasing the channel number. 


Numeric Keys 

Function: TV 

Function: TV (previously selected channel number is selected) 

POWER 

Power OFF. 

Turning the power off. 

FACTORY 

Factory OFF (Factory mode) 

In Factory mode, turning Factory mode off. 

Factory ON (Non-Factory mode). 

In Non-Factory mode, turn Fuctory mode on. 

HOME MENU 

Menu ON. 

In Factory mode, turn Factory mode off. 

VOLUME+ 

Volume UP. 

Increasing 10 the adjustment value. (PANEL FACTORY) 

VOLUME- 

Volume DOWN. 

Decreasing 10 the adjustment value. (PANEL FACTORY) 

DRIVE OFF (Notel) 

Drive Mode OFF. 

Turning Drive mode off. 

INTEGRATOR 

INTEGRATOR MENU ON. 

Enter INTEGRATOR MODE. 


(Note 1) When ten seconds have passed since the [DRIVE OFF] key was pressed at the standby, it becomes invalid. 

Please press [POWER] key from the [DRIVE OFF] key pressing within ten seconds when you do power supply ON while 
driven OFF. 


© w o' 

'mSr GENERATION 


090 
O 0 O 
090 
0(30 



E3I CZHZ3 IE3 

O 


& oo o 
o 


PDP service 
remote control 



ECSdDIZ) 
® ® (3) 
® © ® 
® © ® 
o ® © 


f^ionccr 


fol f¥1 f¥1 [VI 

® © ® 
® © ® 
® ® ® 
o ® © 


acos 


0 s ! m 'f 3 .’ s i l T 

5 'SBS 

sort; 


PDP-5010FD 


PDP-5010FD 


82 


1 


2 


3 


4 






5 


6 


7 


8 


6.1.5 PDP SERVICE REMOTE CONTROL 

• The keys labeled with the same names on the service remote control unit have the same functions as those of the supplied 
remote control unit. (See "2.3 PANEL FACILITIES.") 

• For the keys not provided on the supplied remote control unit, see the explanations below: 



GENERATION switch for remote control codes 
This switch selects the generation of remote control 
codes to be transmitted: 

1 : The old-generation codes are transmitted. 

2: The new-generation codes are transmitted. 

With this generation plasma display, 
set the switch to 2. 


INTEGRATOR 

Press this key to enter Integrator mode. 


INPUT 

Press this key to cyclically change the input source. 


EXT INPUT 

Press this key to cyclically change only the 
external input source. 


SUB INPUT 

Not used with this model. 


DRIVE OFF 

Press this key to turn off the panel drive. 

For details on how to cancel this command, 
see the explanation for the DRV command. 


FACTORY 

Press this key to enter Factory mode. 

2nd FACTORY 

Not used with this model. 


AUTO SETUP 

Use this key for automatic setup, such as 
the display position setting when an analog 
PC signal is input. 

ID NO. SET 

Not used with this model. 


POWER CONTROL 

Not used with this model. 

CLEAR 

Not used with this model. 

POWER ON 

Press this key to turn on the unit. 
This key cannot turn the unit off. 

POWER OFF 

Press this key to turn off the unit. 
This key cannot turn the unit on. 


POINT ZOOM 

Not used with this model. 

ZOOM +/- 

Not used with this model. 


C 


D 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


83 


5 


6 


7 


8 






1 


2 


3 


4 


6.1.6 FACTORY HIERARCHICAL TABLE 


A 


Large Item 

Variable / Adjustment Range 

Remarks 


Middle Item 


Small Item 

6.2.1 INFORMATION 




6.2.1. 1 VERSION (1) 





6.2.1. 2 VERSION (2) 





6.2.1. 3 VERSION (3) 





6.2.1. 4 MAIN NG 

CLEAR <=> 

NO <=> YES 



6.2.1. 5 TEMPERATURE 





6.2.1. 6 HOUR METER 

MTB HOUR METER CLEAR 

NO <=> YES 



6.2.1. 7 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 





6.2.1. 8 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 





6.2.1. 9 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 





6.2.1.10 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 





6.2.1 .1 1 DTV TUNING STATUS 1 





6.2.1.12 DTV TUNING STATUS 2 





6.2.1.13 DTV TUNING STATUS 3 





6.2.1.14 DTV TV-GUIDE BER 



for the technical analysis 


6.2.1.15 DEBUG INFO 



for the technical analysis 

6.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+) 




6.2.2. 1 PANEL INFORMATION 





6. 2.2. 2 PANEL WORKS 





6. 2.2. 3 POWERDOWN 





6. 2.2. 4 SHUTDOWN 





6.2.2. 5 PANEL-1 ADJ (+) 

VOL SUS <=> 

000 to 255 

Equivalent to VSU (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 



VOL OFFSET <=> 

000 to 255 

Equivalent to VOF (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 



VOL RST P <=> 

000 to 255 

Equivalent to VRP (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 



VOL XPOFS1 <=> 

000 to 255 

Equivalent to VX1 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 



VOL XPOFS2 <=> 

000 to 255 

Equivalent to VX2 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 



VOL YNOFS1 <=> 

000 to 255 

Equivalent to VY1 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 



VOL YNOFS3 <=> 

000 to 255 

Equivalent to VY3 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 



VOL YNOFS4 <=> 

000 to 255 

Equivalent to VY4 (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 



RESET1ST_KSB <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to R1 K (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



RESET2ND_KSB <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to R2K (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



YSTL_1SF_KSB <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to Y1K (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



YSTL_1SF_HZ <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to Y1Z (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



XSUS_1 ST_B <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to XI B (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



YSUS_2ND_B <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to Y2B (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



XSUS_3RD_B <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to X3B (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



YSUS_B <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to YSB (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



XSUS_B <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to XSB (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



YSTL_KSB <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to YTK (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



YSTLJHZ <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to YTZ (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



YSTL_2SF_KSB <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to Y2K (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



YSTL_2SF_HZ <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to Y2Z (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



YSTL_FMR_KSB <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to YNK (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



YSTL_FMR_HZ <=> 

1 12 to 144 

Equivalent to YNZ (Setting value: 128 fixed) 



SUS FREQ. <=> 

MODE 1 to MODE 8 

Equivalent to SFR (Setting value: MODE1) 


6.2.2. 6 PANEL-2 ADJ (+) 

R-HIGH <=> 

000 to 51 1 

Equivalent to PRH (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 



G-HIGH <=> 

000 to 51 1 

Equivalent to PGH (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 



B-HIGH <=> 

000 to 51 1 

Equivalent to PBH (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 



R-LOW <=> 

000 to 999 

Equivalent to PRL (Setting value: 512 fixed) 



G-LOW <=> 

000 to 999 

Equivalent to PGL (Setting value: 512 fixed) 



B-LOW <=> 

000 to 999 

Equivalent to PBL (Setting value: 512 fixed) 



ABL <=> 

000 to 255 

Equivalent to ABL (Setting value: Factory adjustment value) 


6.2.2. 7 PANEL FUNCTION (+) 

R-LEVEL <=> 

L.V-0 to LV-7 

Equivalent to RRL (Setting value: Lv-1) 



G-LEVEL <=> 

L.V-0 to LV-7 

Equivalent to RGL (Setting value: Lv-1) 



B-LEVEL <=> 

LV-0 to LV-7 

Equivalent to RBL (Settinq value: Lv-0) 



ADDRESS LI <=> 

PH0 to PH9 

Equivalent to AP0S*- (Setting value: PHI) 



ADDRESS L2 <=> 

PH0 to PH9 

Equivalent to AP0S-* (Setting value: PH0) 



ADDRESS L3 <=> 

PH0 to PH9 

Equivalent to APIS*- (Setting value: PH2) 



ADDRESS L4 <=> 

PH0 to PH9 

Equivalent to APIS-* (Setting value: PHI) 



ADDRESS U1 <=> 

PH0 to PH9 

Equivalent to AP2S*- (Setting value: PHI) 



ADDRESS U2 <=> 

PH0 to PH9 

Equivalent to AP2S-* (Setting value: PH0) 



ADDRESS U3 <=> 

PH0 to PH9 

Equivalent to AP3S*- (Setting value: PH2) 



ADDRESS U4 <=> 

PH0 to PH9 

Equivalent to AP3S-* (Setting value: PHI) 



STK MODE <=> 

OFF <=> MODE1 to MODE8 <=> 

SKM S00 to S07 


*: Setting value 


F 


84 


PDP-501 OFD 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


A 


Large Item 

Variable / Adjustment Range 

Remarks 


Middle Item 

| Small Item 

6.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+) 




6.2.2. 8 ETC. (+) 

BACKUP DATA <=> 

NO OPRT <=> TRANSFER or ERR 

Equivalent to BCP 

DIGITAL EEPROM <=> 

NO OPRT <=> DELETE/REPAIR 

Equivalent to FAJ/UAJ 

PD INFO. <=> 

NO OPRT <=> CLEAR 

Equivalent to CPD 

SD INFO. <=> 

NO OPRT <=> CLEAR 

Equivalent to CSD 

HR-MTR INFO. <=> 

NO OPRT <=> CLEAR 

Equivalent to CHM 

PM/BI -B5 <=> 

NO OPRT <=> CLEAR 

Equivalent to CPM 

P COUNT INFO. <=> 

NO OPRT <=> CLEAR 

Equivalent to CPC 

MAX TEMP. <=> 

NO OPRT <=> CLEAR 

Equivalent to CMT 

6.2.2. 9 RASTER MASK SETUP (+) 

MASK OFF 

<=> 48V <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 72V <=> 
75V <=> 60 P <=> 

Equivalent to MKS+S00 

RST MASK 01 <=> 

Equivalent to MKS+S51 

... 

• • • 

RST MASK 25 <=> 

Equivalent to MKS+S75 

6.2.2.10 PATTERN MASK SETUP (+) 

MASK OFF 

<=> 48V <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 72V <=> 
75V <=> 60 P <=> 

Equivalent to MKS+S00 

PTN MASK 01 <=> 

Equivalent to MKS+S01 

• • • 

• • • 

PTN MASK 49 <=> 

Equivalent to MKS+S49 

6.2.2. 1 1 COMBI MASK SETUP (+) 

MASK OFF 

<=> 48V <=> 50V <=> 60V <=> 72V <=> 
75V <=> 60 P <=> 

Equivalent to MKC+S00 

CMB MASK 01 <=> 

Equivalent to MKC+S01 

• • • 

... 

CMB MASK 17 <=> 

Equivalent to MKC+S17 

6.2.3 OPTION 


6.2.3. 1 EDID WRITE MODE <=> 


DISABLE <=> ENABLE 

Exclusively used for 
production line 

6. 2.3.2 ANTENNA MODE <=> 


CABLE <=> AIR 

6. 2.3.3 AFT <=> 


DISABLE <=> ENABLE 

6. 2.3.4 SYNC DET (+) 



for the technical analysis 

6. 2.3.5 CC(+) 



for the technical analysis 

6.2.4 INITIALIZE 


6.2.4. 1 SIDE MASK LEVEL (+) 

SIDE MASK LEVEL <=> 



6. 2.4.2 FINAL SETUP 

DATA RESET <=> 

NO <=> YES 


6. 2.4. 3 HMG/HG SERVICE MODE 

MODE SHIFT <=> 

NO <=> YES 


6. 2.4.4 Wide XGA AUTO <=> 


DISABLE <=> ENABLE 

Exclusively used for 
technical analysis 
(details omitted) 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


85 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


6.1.7 INDICATIONS IN SERVICE FACTORY MODE 



20 25 30 35 


1 


ZSZ 


ZT 

z 

JZ 














V D 1 

- 

3 0 

i 

0 1 

- 

NT V 

- 

AH B 






1 


T1 


T1 


T1 


T1 













© Input function 


Input Functions 

OSD 

VIDEO 1 to 7 

VD 1 to 7 

Terrestrial Wave A 

ARA 

Terrestrial Wave B 

ARB 

Cable A 

CBA 

Cable B 

CBB 

Home Gallery (Regular model only) 

HG 

Home Media Gallery (ELITE model only) 

HMG 

PC 

PC 


' SIG mode and Screen size 

Note: See SIG-Mode Tables. (See next page.; 

) Color system and Signal type 


Color System and Signal Type 

OSD 

NTSC 

Composite input 

NTV 

S-connector input 

NTS 

Y/CB/CR 

CBR 

Y/PB/PR 

PBR 

RGB 

RGB 

Digital Video signal 

DIG 


© Option (Destination, Panel Generation, etc. 


Options 

OSD 

Regular model 

ATB 

ELITE model 

AHB 


PDP-5010FD 


86 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


(D SIG Mode and Screen size (by User is displayed) 

1st and 2nd characters : Resolution of the input signal a 

3rd and 4th characters : Refresh rate of the input signal 
5th character : Selection of the screen size 


■ Input signal mode table for video signals (resolutions and V frequencies) 


1 st to 4th Character 

Signal Type 

Fv (Hz) 

Fh (kHz) 

10 

60 

SDTV*525i 

60.000 

15.750 

20 

60 

SDTV*525p 

60.000 

31.500 

30 

60 

HDTV*1 125i 

60.000 

33.750 

40 

60 

HDTV*750p 

60.000 

45.000 

50 

24 

HDTV*1 125p 

24.000 

27.000 

50 

60 

HDTV*1 125p 

60.000 

67.500 


Fv: Vertical Frequency, Fh: Florizontal Frequency 


■ Input signal mode table for PC signals (resolutions and V frequencies) 


1st to 4th Character 

Signal Type 

Fv (Hz) 

Fh (kHz) 

Cl 

70 

720 x 400 

70.087 

31.469 

C2 

60 

640 x 480 

59.940 

31.469 

C4 

60 

800 x 600 

60.317 

37.879 

C6 

60 

1280x720 

60.000 

44.800 

C7 

60 

1024x768 

60.004 

48.363 

C9 

60 

1360x768 

60.015 

47.712 

D6 

60 

1280 x 1024 

60.000 

64.000 


Fv: Vertical Frequency, Fh: Florizontal Frequency 


■ Current selection of the screen size 


5th Character 

GUI Notation 

VIDEO 

PC 

Remarks 

0 

DOT BY DOT 

• (*) 

— 


1 

4:3 

• 

• 


2 

FULL 

• 

• 


3 

ZOOM 

• 

- 


4 

CINEMA 

• 

- 


5 

WIDE 

• 

- 



•: supported, -: unsupported 

Note (*): It is effective only with models having the Full HD panel. 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


87 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


6.2 DETAILS OF FACTORY MENU 

6.2.1 INFORMATION 


■ Operation items 


No. 

Function/Display 

Context 

RS-232C 

Command 

6.2. 1.1 

VERSION (1) 

The Flash memory versions for each device are displayed. (Common part) 

QS1 

6.2. 1.2 

VERSION (2) 

The Flash memory versions for each device are displayed. (Individual part) 

QSE 

6.2. 1.3 

VERSION (3) 

6.2. 1.4 

MAIN NG 

The Shutdown Message ID/Event Times in Main Microcomputer are displayed. 

QNG 

6.2. 1.5 

TEMPERATURE 

TheTemperature/FAN rotating status in Main Microcomputer are displayed. 

QMT 

6.2. 1.6 

HOUR METER 

The HOUR METER/P-COUNT information are displayed. 

QS3 

6.2. 1.7 

HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 

The Information of HDMI information files are displayed. 

- 

6.2. 1.8 

HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 

6.2. 1.9 

VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 

Display the Signal Information on VDEC. 

- 

6.2.1.10 

VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 

6.2.1.11 

DTV TUNING STATUS 1 

Digital broadcast information and status is displayed upon receiving digital broadcast 
signal. 

- 

6.2.1.12 

DTV TUNING STATUS 2 

6.2.1.13 

DTV TUNING STATUS 3 

6.2.1.14 

DTV TV-GUIDE BER 

TV-Guide Bit Error Rate information 

- 

6.2.1.15 

DEBUG INFO 

Debug information 

- 


l 6.2.1.1 VERSION (1) 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 


r 



i 

i 

NFORMAT 

1 

ON 




V D 1 

- 

3 

0 

1 

0 

1 

- 

NT V 

- 

AH B 


■ 



1 






























































VERS 

1 

z 

o 









































































1 

/ 

F 










- 

0 7 A 








0 1 

A 















M A 1 

N 









- 

0 2 K 2 







0 1 

K 















MULT 

1 


P R S 




- 

0 2 K 








0 1 

A 





















P 

1 

C 




- 

0 2 K 

































































MOD U L 

E 







- 

0 6 A 








0 1 

A 















S EQ 


P R S 






_ 

0 3 W 








0 1 

A 































































































PAN 

E L 


1 

N FO 



xxxxxxxx 




























































_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 


□ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

J 

_ 







Microcomputer 

Item Name 

Display Example 
(Execution program block) 

Display Example 
(Boot block) 

l/F microcomputer 

l/F 

-07A 

01 A 

Main microcomputer 

MAIN 

-02 K2 

01K 

Multi processor 

MULTI PRS 

-02K 

01 A 

Multi processor 

MULTI PIC 

-02K 


Module microcomputer 

MODULE 

-06A 

01 A 

Sequence processor 

SEQ PRS 

-03W_A 

01 A 


Note: In the 29-32 rows, the Boot version information on each device is displayed. 

In the 19-24 rows, the version of the execution program is displayed. 

• PANEL INFO: It displays the generation of the panel, inchage and the type of the panel. For details on display values and settings, 
see "10: Panel Information” in "9.3.1. QS1 (PANEL STATUS)." 


PDP-5010FD 


88 


1 


2 


3 


4 






5 


6 


7 


8 


6.2.1. 2 VERSION (2) 






1 

NFORMAT 

1 

ON 




C B A 

- 

3 

0 6 

01 

- 

D 1 

G 

- 

AH B 





















_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 



_ 


_ 

_ 









VERS 

I 

O N 

( 

2 

) 









































































DTV 








































H AR DWAR 

E 


xxxxxxxx 
























S ER 

1 

A L 




0 

1 

2 3 4 5 6 

7 
























RUNT 

1 

M 

E 



xxxxxxxx 
























C FE 







HHHHHHHH 
























KERNEL 




HHHHHHHH 
























ROOTS 





HHHHHHHH 
























FLAGS 





H 

/ W 



( 

Y 

) 

































DVR 



( Y ) 


FON T S ( Y ) 
























D F A ST 

( 

Y 

) 


P LOG 


( 

Y 

) 



































1 


1 

1 








































_ 










Meaning 

Item Name 

Display Example 

DTV Hardware Version 

HARDWARE 

XXXXXXXX 

DTV Hardware Serial 

SERIAL 

01234567 

DTV Runtime Version 

RUNTIME 

HHHHHHHH 

CFE Version 

CFE 

HHHHHHHH 

KERNEL Version 

KERNEL 

HHHHHHHH 

ROOTS Version 

ROOTS 

HHHHHHHH 

FLAGS 

FLAGS 

H/W (Y) 

DVR (Y) FONTS(Y) 

DFAST(Y) PLOG (Y) 


6.2.1. 3 VERSION (3) 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 



D 


E 


Meaning 

Item Name 

Display Example 

HMG/HG module Version 

HMG/HG 

01234567 

User Password 

PASSWORD 

1234 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


89 


5 


6 


7 


8 






1 


2 


3 


4 


6 . 2 . 1. 4 MAIN NG 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 



MTB side's Shutdown NG information 


OSD: MAIN 

OSD: SUB 

Cause of Shutdown 

AUDIO 

.... 

Short-circuit of the speaker terminal or failure of audio amplifier. 

MODULE 

.... 

Failure of communication to Module microcomputer. 

MA-3L 


3-wire Serial Communication of Main microcomputer. 


IF 

Communication failure of IF microcomputer 


MULTI 

Multi Processor communication failure 

MA-IIC 


IIC Communication failure of Main microcomputer 


FE1 

Analog Tuner 1 


FE2 

Analog Tuner 2 


MSPMAP 

MSP/MAP 


AV-SW 

AV Switch 


RGB-SW 

RGB Switch 


VDEC 

VDEC 


SDRAM 

VDEC - SDRAM 


ADC 

AD/PLL 


HDMI 

HDMI 


US-MSP 

MSP 

MAIN 


Communication failure of Main microcomputer 

FAN 

FAN1 

Fan stopped 


FAN2 

Fan stopped (Only with models having the Full HD panel) 

TEMP2 


Abnormally high temperature at MTB. 

DTUNER 


Failure of Digital Tuner 


PS/RST 

Failure to DTV Starting 


RETRY 

DTV communication error 


DE-BCM 

Abnormally in BCM7038 


DE-FE 

Tuner 1 or 2 


DE-CAS 

Card l/F 1C 


DE-VBI 

VBI Slicer 


DE-EPI 

EEPROM 


TV-G 

TV-Guide Error 


HOME-G 

Failure at Home Gallery 


DTVMID 

Middleware 


DTVAPP 

Application 

RST-MA 

M-DCDC 

Abnormally in RST2 of MAIN Assy, (power decrease of DC-DC converter) 


RELAY 

Abnormally in RST4 of MAIN Assy, (power decrease of Relay power) 

HMG 


Failure at Home Media Gallery 


HMG 

Home Media Gallery startup error 

MA-EEP 


IIC communication line between EEPROM and MAIN. 


PDP-501 OFD 


90 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 



A 


B 


Operation: 

Even if [^] key or [-* ] key is pressed, {CLEAR <=> :YES} <=> {CLEAR <=> :NO} is repeated. 

If the [ENTER/SET] key is kept on pressing for 5 second when the status of this menu is <YES>, 
clear process will begin. 


c 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


5 


6 


7 


8 





1 


2 


3 


4 


6.2.1. 5 TEMPERATURE 

A present temperature and the FAN rotation are displayed. 

If either [^] key or [^] key is pressed, the display data is refreshed. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 



• Display/Meaning 

TEMPI : The temperature of the sensor on the panel side is displayed by the Fahrenheit (F). 

TEMP2 :The temperature conversion display is done with 10 bit the A/D input value of IF uCOM 90 pin (AN4). It is displayed by 
both the Fahrenheit (F) and 8 bit A/D value. 

(Remark: When temperature (F) of the sensor becomes more than a specified temperature, the shutdown start of processing.) 
FAN1 : The value of the FAN rotating state is displayed. 

STOP: stopped, LOW: slow speed, HIGH: high speed. 

FAN2 : The value of the rotation state of FAN is displayed. 

During a rotation of FAN, 8bit D/A value output from 2 pin (DAO) of IF uCOM is displayed. 

It is displayed with OFF during a stop (only for the FHD model). 

B-SENSOR : The value that indicated the degree of brightness input into an Room light sensor is displayed. 

AD value when the output of the Room light sensor was input into 89 pin (AN5) of IF uCOM is displayed. 


o 


E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


92 


i 


2 


3 


4 







5 


6 


7 


8 


6.2.1. 6 HOUR METER 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 






1 

NFORMAT 

1 

ON 




V D 1 

_ 

3 

0 

6 

0 1 

_ 

Nflfl 

_ 

AH B 




















I 

I 


I 

I 

I 


I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

□ 

I 

I 

I 










HOUR 


M 

E T ER 









































































PANE 

L 













0 

0 

1 

5 

1 

H 


2 1 M 














MTB 















0 

0 

1 

5 

1 

H 


2 1 M 




























































































PANE 

L 


COUNT/ 

S E R 

[ 

A L 

































































P 

- 

COUNT 







0 

0 0 

0 0 

0 

9 5 


T 

1 

MES 














S E R 

1 

A L 












































































































































J 








































J 










A 


B 


• Display/Meaning 


Meaning 

Item Name 

Display Example 

Corresponding RS-232C Command 

HOUR METER (PANEL) 

PANEL 

00151H 21M 

QS3 

HOUR METER (MTB) 

MTB 

00151H 21M 

QS3 

POWER ON COUNTER 

P-COUNT 

00000095 TIMES 

QS3 

SYSTEM SERIAL 

SERIAL 


QS3 


Note: The PANEL-side's HOUR METER/P-COUNT acquires information from the PANEL-side. C 


• MTB HOUR METER 

In HOUR METER screen on Factory Menu, press the [ENTER] key, and then it moves to the screnn to clear MTB 
HOUR METER. (MTB HOUR METER is cleared only.) 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 



Operation: 

Even if [^] key or [^] key is pressed, {CLEAR <=> :YES} <=> {CLEAR <=> :NO) is repeated. 

If the [ENTER/SET] key is kept on pressing for 5 second when the status of this menu is <YES>, 
clear process will begin. 

MTB HOUR METER is cleared only. PANEL HOUR METER is not cleared. 


F 


PDP-501 0FD 


93 


5 


6 


7 


8 








1 


2 


3 


4 


6.2. 1.7 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 1 

A 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 






1 

NFORMAT 

1 

ON 




V D 1 

- 

1 

0 

6 

0 1 

- 

NT V 

- 

AH B 



























I 

I 

I 




I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 










H DM 

1 


S 

1 

G NA L 


1 

N FO 


1 


































































PWR 5 V 


ACT 

1 

V 

E 


MOD 

E 




HDMI 

















V S Y NC 


ACT 

1 

V 

E 


B 

1 

S T 




- 

- 



















C K D T 



ACT 

1 

V 

E 


N V A L 




0 

0 

0 6 

1 

4 4 














SC D T 



ACT 

1 

V 

E 


C T S V A L 


0 0 

7 

4 2 

5 

0 














DC R P T 


ACT 

1 

V 

E 


A KS V 



B 7 

0 3 

6 1 

F 7 1 

4 












AU T H 



ACT 

1 

V 

E 


B KS V 



5 1 

1 

E F 2 

1 

AC D 

























1 

T 


CN T 


N O 
































EXTCO L 


X 

V 

YCC7 0 9 


























RGB 


QR 


DEFAULT 



























P 

1 

X D E P 


1 

2 

b 

j 

t 


























































































Displays the input signal information of HDMI terminal 


Item 

Meaning 

PWR5V 

+5 V power detection (18 pin of HDMI terminal) 

VSYNC 

VSYNC detection 

CKDT 

Clock detection 

SCDT 

SYNC detection 

DCRPT 

HDCP decryption status 

AUTHEN 

HDCP authentication status 

MODE 

HDMI mode status 

BIST 

— 

NVAL 

N value 

CTSVAL 

CTS value 

AKSV 

Shadow AKSV value 

BKSV 

Shadow BKSV value 

ITCNT 

IT content (AVI info) 

EXTCOL 

Extension calorimetry (AVI info) 

RGVQR 

RGB range (AVI info) 

PIXDEP 

Number of pixel/bit 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


94 


1 


2 


3 


4 




5 


6 


7 


8 


6.2.1. 8 HDMI SIGNAL INFO 2 

A 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 






1 

N F 0 R MA T 

1 

ON 




V D 1 

- 

1 

0 

6 

0 1 

- 

NT V 

- 

AH B 




















I 

I 

I 

i 

I 


I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 


I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 









H DM 

1 


S 

1 G NA L 


1 

N FO 


2 


































































H 


RES 


2 2 

0 0 




COL 


S P 


4 2 

2 


















V 


RES 


0 5 6 3 




CO LME T 


70 

9 


















H 


D E 



1 

9 2 0 




ASPECT 


1 

6 


9 

















V 


D E 



0 5 4 0 




ACT 

1 

V 

E 






















1 

N T R L 


1 

N T 





S 

a 

m e 


a 

s 


P 

i 

c 

t 
















V 


POL 


POS 





V 


FMT 























H 


POL 


POS 





1 

9 

2 0 

X 

i 

0 

8 

0 

i 

@ 6 

0 















AU D 

1 

O 


4 8 

k 





P 

1 

X 


R P 


0 0 

























PCM 





SOURC 

E 


P 

1 

O NE E R 




















2 0 

b 

i 

t 



DVR 

- 

D T 9 

0 






























































































Displays input signal status of HDMI terminal 


Display Item 

Meaning 

H RES 

Number of horizontal pixels (decimal) 

V RES 

Number of vertical lines (decimal) 

H DE 

Number of effectively horizontal pixels (decimal) 

V DE 

Number of effectively vertical lines (decimal) 

INTRL 

Interlace (=INT) or progressive (=PRG) 

V POL 

VSYNC polarity 

H POL 

HSYNC polarity 

AUDIO (first line) 

Samplinq frequency, (ex. DVD: 48kHz, CD: 44.1kHz) *1 

AUDIO (second line) 

PCM (PCM) or No PCM (=no PCM) 

AUDIO (third line) 

Quantization bit 

COL SP 

Color space (AVI Info) (422 or 444 or RGB) *2 

COLMET 

N/A 

ASPECT 

Aspect (AVI Info) 

ACTIVE 

Video active format (AVI Info) 

V FMT 

Video identification code (AVI Info) 

PIX RP 

N/A 

SOURCE (first line) 

Vendor name of the emission device 

SOURCE (second line) 

Model name of the emission device 


*1 : Confirm if this item is displayed when the audio is not outputted. 

*2: If may not match to the state of source devices when the color is abnormal. 


Display of HDMI FACTORY and correspondence of resolution 

Please confirm the following 5 items when the picture doesn't come out. 


Input 

FACTORY Display 

Signal 

H RES 

V RES 

H DE 

V DE 

V FMT 

480i (525i) @ 60 

858 

262 or 263 

720 

240 

720x480i @ 60 

480p (525p) @ 60 

858 

525 

720 

480 

720x480p @60 

1080i (11 25i) @ 60 

2200 

562 or 563 

1920 

540 

1 920x1 080i @ 60 

720p (750p) @ 60 

1650 

750 

1280 

720 

1280x720p @ 60 

1080p (11 25p) @ 60 

2200 

1125 

1920 

1080 

1 920x1 080p @ 60 

1080p (1 125p) @ 24 

2750 

1125 

1920 

1080 

1 920x1 080p @ 24 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


95 


5 


6 


7 


8 





6.2.1. 9 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 1 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 






1 

NFORMAT 

1 

ON 




V D 1 

- 

3 

0 

6 

0 1 

- 

NT V 

- 

AH B 



























I 

I 

□ 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

□ 

I 

I 

□ 

I 

I 










VDEC 


S 

1 

G NA L 


1 

N FO 


1 

































































MV DE C 


- 

0 

0 

0 


0 0 




SVDE C 


- 

4 0 

0 


0 0 


















- 

0 

0 

1 


0 0 










- 

4 0 

1 


0 0 


















- 

0 

9 4 


0 0 










- 

4 9 

4 


0 0 


















- 

0 

9 

5 


0 0 










- 

4 9 

5 


0 0 


















- 

0 

9 

6 


0 0 










- 

4 9 

6 


0 0 


















- 

0 

9 

8 


0 0 










- 

- 

- 

- 


- 

- 


















- 

1 

B 5 


0 0 










- 

5 B 5 


0 0 


















- 

1 

B 6 


0 0 










- 

5 B 6 


0 0 


















- 

1 

B 7 


0 0 










- 

5 B 7 


0 0 





































































□ 






□ 



J 












_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 


_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

□ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

□ 

_ 

_ 

□ 

_ 

_ 







Displays signal status that is input to VDEC. 


Device 

Sub Address 
(Main screen) 

Sub Address 
(Sub screen) 

Meaning 

VDEC 

OOOh 

400h 

Line system distinction result 

001 h 

401 h 

VTR distinction result 

094h 

494h 

Slot number 

095h 

495h 

Color system distinction result 

096h 

496h 

ACC coefficient 

098h 

— 

3D YC flaq 

1 B5h 

5B5h 

MV detection 1 

1 B6h 

5B6h 

MV detection 2 

1 B7h 

5B7h 

MV detection 3 


6.2.1.10 VDEC SIGNAL INFO 2 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 



Displays signal status that is input to VDEC. 


Device 

Sub Address 
(Main screen) 

Sub Address 
(Sub screen) 

Meaning 

VDEC 

205h 

605h 

CC detection 1 

208h 

608h 

CC detection 2 

20Bh 

60Bh 

CC-CRI detection 

20Ch 

60Ch 

XDS content advisor 0 

20Dh 

60Dh 

XDS content advisor 1 


PDP-501 OFD 


96 


1 


2 


3 


4 







5 


6 


7 


8 


6.2.1 .1 1 DTV TUNING STATUS 1 

Displays digital broadcast signal information and status upon receiving digital signal. 


5 


10 


15 

16 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 



A 


B 


6.2.1.12 DTVTUNING STATUS 2 

Displays digital broadcast signal information and status upon receiving digital signal. I 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 



6.2.1.13 DTVTUNING STATUS 3 

Displays digital broadcast signal information and status upon receiving digital signal. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 



6.2.1.14 DTV TV-GUIDE BER 

Exclusively used for production line. TV-Guide error bit ratio information is displayed. 


6.2.1.15 DEBUG INFO 


Exclusively used for technical analysis. Debug information for development use is displayed. 


F 


PDP-501 0FD 


97 


5 


6 


7 


8 









1 


2 


3 


4 


6.2.2 PANEL FACTORY (+) 


■ Operation Items 

This is the menu screen for the adjustment of the panel. Data acquisition and value adjustment can be performed for 
the following items: 


No. 

Indication 

Description of functions 

6.2.2. 1 

PANEL INFORMATION 

Data, such as the version of the microcomputer of the panel, product serial number, and 
statuses of memories for adjustment values for the main unit and for backup, are 
displayed. 

6.2. 2. 2 

PANEL WORKS 

Operation data, such as accumulated pulse-meter count, accumulated hour-meter 
count, accumulated power-on count, and the temperature detected by the sensor, are 
displayed. 

6.2. 2. 3 

POWER DOWN 

The power-down history is displayed, with the hour-meter values that indicate the hour 
values when power-downs occurred. 

6. 2. 2. 4 

SHUT DOWN 

The shutdown history is displayed, with the hour-meter values that indicate the hour 
values when shutdowns occurred. 

6.2. 2. 5 

PANEL-1 ADJ (+) 

Settings of the driving pulse timing and driving voltage can be performed. 

6. 2. 2. 6 

PANEL-2 ADJ (+) 

White balance and ABL (power consumption) for the panel can be set. 

6. 2. 2. 7 

PANEL FUNCTION (+) 

Perform panel-degradation correction-level setting, phase adjustment of the address, 
and the streaking-correction setting. 

6. 2. 2. 8 

ETC. (+) 

Copying of backup data and clearance of various data can be performed. 

6. 2. 2. 9 

RASTER MASK SETUP (+) 

The mask indication (RASTER) can be set and indicated. 

6.2.2.10 

PATTERN MASK SETUP (+) 

The mask indication (PATTERN) can be set and indicated. 

6.2.2.11 

COMBI MASK SETUP (+) 

The mask indication (COMBI) can be set and indicated. 


o 


E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


98 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


■ Details of indications in each layer 

• In the following examples, GUI images for a 50-inch and 60-inch models are indicated. 


6.2.2.1 PANEL INFORMATION 


• Data, such as the version of the microcomputer of the panel, product serial number, and statuses of memories for 
adjustment values for the main unit and for backup, are displayed. No other layers are nested below this layer, and 
there are no adjustment items. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PAN 

E 

L 


FACT 





VD 1 

- 

1 

0 

6 

0 5 

- 

NT V 

- 

AT B 










_ 

_ 

I 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

I 

_ 


_ 


I 

I 

_ 

_ 

_ 


I 

_ 


_ 


I 

_ 

□ 

_ 


□ 










1 

PAN 

E 

L 


1 

N 

FORMAT 

1 

O N 























2 



MO DU L 

E 




= 

0 

2 F 







0 

5 F 
















s 






- 

P RG 



= 

0 

2 F 

























K 






- 

DAT 



= 

0 

2 F 

























\l 



SEQ 

- 

P R S 



= 

0 

4 Y 







0 4 F 
















0 






- 

PRO 



= 

0 

4 


























7 






- 

P 

1 

C 



= 

0 

3 Y 

























Y 






- 

SEQ 



6 2 

0 Y 

























9 








































A 



S E R 

1 

A L 
































B 



D 

1 

G 


E E P 



ADJUSTED 





















Y 

1 


BACKUP 




ADJUSTED 





















D 



























□ 



□ 










Y 


_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

□ 

_ 




_ 






■ Key operation 

<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL WORKS 
<UP> : Shifting to COMBI MASK SETUP 
(+) 

<LVR> : Updating displayed information 


■ Display items 


MODULE 

The 

-PRG 

The 

-DAT 

The 

SEQ-PRG 

The 

-PRG 

The 

-PIC 

The 

-SEQ 

The 

SERIAL 

The 

DIG.EEP 

The 

BACKUP 

The 


version of data written in the Module microcomputer (IC3601) is indicated, 
program version of the Module microcomputer is indicated, 
data version of the Module microcomputer is indicated, 
version of data written in the Sequence LSI (IC3301) is indicated, 
program version of the Sequence LSI is indicated. 

Picture-data version of the Sequence LSI is indicated, 
sequence-data version of the Sequence LSI is indicated, 
serial number of the module is indicated. 

adjusted status of the EEPROM that is mounted on the DIGITAL Assy is indicated, 
adjusted status of the EEPROM for backup that is mounted on the SENSOR Assy is indicated. 


D 


6.2.2 .2 PANEL WORKS 

• Data on operations, such as the accumulated pulse-meter counts, hour-meter count, power-on count, and temperature 
detected by the sensor, are sent back. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no adjustment items. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PANEL 


FACT 





VD 1 

- 

1 

0 

6 

0 5 

- 

N T V 

- 

AT B 










_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

: 

_ 

X 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

□ 

_ 


J 


_ 








1 

PANEL 


WORKS 





























2 








































3 



PM 

- 

B 

1 





0 0 0 0 

1 

0 5 

7 M 




















4 



PM 

- 

B 2 





0 0 0 0 

1 

0 6 

2 M 




















5 



PM 

- 

B 3 





0 0 0 0 

1 

1 

8 

5 M 




















Y 



PM 

- 

B 

4 





0 0 0 0 

0 6 8 

8 M 




















7 



PM 

- 

B 5 





0 0 0 0 

0 9 2 

6 M 




















Y 








































9 



H R 

- 

MTR 




0 0 0 0 

2 8 H 


0 2 M 


















¥ 

i 


P 

- 

COUNT 



0 0 0 0 

0 0 8 2 


T 

1 

M 

E 

S 















B 



TEMP 

1 





+ 

3 3 


8 


/ 


+ 

7 5 


1 
















Y 

i 







































D 







I 




I 

1 

1 

1 










I 



J 













¥ 



_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 




_ 


1 

_ 









_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


□ 

_ 

_ 




_ 

_ 






■ Key operation 

<DOWN> : Shifting to POWER DOWN 
<UP> : Shifting to PANEL INFORMATION 

<L/R> : Updating displayed information 


Temperature unit is " °C (Centigrade) ". 


■ Contents of the Display item 

• PM-B1 to B5: The accumulated pulse-meter counts for the 5 blocks on the screen are indicated. 

(the lowest-order digit represents millions of pulses.) 

• HR-MTR:The hour-meter value (accumulated power-on hours) is indicated. 

• P-COUNT: The accumulated power-on count is indicated. 

• TEMPI : The current panel temperature and the historical maximum temperature recorded in memory are indicated. 

The range of temperature indication is from -50.0 to +99.9. (The temperature unit is " °C (Centigrade) ".) 

PDP-5010FD 99 

■ 5 « 6 « 7 « 8 " 





A 


6. 2. 2. 3 POWERDOWN 

• The power-down history is displayed. The last most 8 power-down histories are displayed with the hour-meter values 
that indicate the hours when power-downs occurred. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no 
adjustment items. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 



I cCauses of power-down and corresponding OSD indications> 


Cause of power-down 

OSD Indication 

Cause of power-down 

OSD Indication 

POWER SUPPLY Unit 

P-PWR 

ADDRESS Assy 

ADRS 

SCAN Assy 

SCAN 

X DRIVE Assy 

XDRV 

5 V power for SCAN Assy 

SCAN5V 

DC/DC converter for X drive 

X-DCDC 

Y DRIVE Assy 

Y-DRV 

X-drive SUS circuit 

X-SUS 

DC/DC converter for Y drive 

Y-DCDC 

Digital DC/DC converter 

D-DCDC 

Y-drive SUS circuit 

Y-SUS 

Unknown 

UNKNOWN 


* When power-down is confirmed, the factor is displayed as "1st", "2nd", according to the accuracy order. 

I * The power-down history is not recorded when the power-down occurred at the same place and same time. 

6. 2. 2. 4 SHUTDOWN 

• The shutdown history is displayed. The last most 8 shutdown histories are displayed with the hour-meter values 
that indicate the hours when shutdowns occurred. No other layers are nested below this layer, and there are no 
adjustment items. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 



* When there is detail information when shutdown occurred, the possible defective part is displayed as Sub information. 

cCause of shut-down and corresponding OSD Indication > 


Cause of shut-down (MAIN) 

Cause of shut-down (SUB) 

Item 

OSD Indication 

Item 

OSD Indication 

Drive Processing 1C 

SQ LSI 

Communication Error 

RTRY 


Drive Stop 

SQ-NON 



Communication Busy 

BUSY 



Version mismatching (H/S) (M/S) 

VER-HS, VER-MS 

MDU-IIC 

MD-IIC 

MAIN EEPROM Communication Error 

EEPROM 

BACKUP EEPROM Communication Error 

BACKUP 



DAC1 Communication Error 

DAC1 



DAC2 Communication Error 

DAC2 

Abnormally in RST2 power supply 

RST2 

- 

- 

Panel temperature 

TMP-NG 

High temperature of the panel 

TEMP-H 

Low temperature of the panel 

TEMP-L 


PDP-5010FD 


100 


i 


2 


3 


4 



A 


6.2 .2.5 PANEL-1 ADJ (+) 

• Timing and voltage for the driving pulse are set. At third line of the screen, the WB (White Balance) table and 
frequency table indicating operation status are displayed, and at fifteenth line of the screen, the item for the upper 
nested layer (PANEL-1 ADJ [+]) is displayed. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer 
below for item selection. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PAN 

E 

L 


FACT 





V D 1 

_ 

1 

0 

6 

0 5 

_ 

N T V 

_ 

AT B 










I 

_ 


I 

I 

I 

_ 


_ 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 


I 

_ 

_ 

_ 

I 

_ 

I 

I 

I 

. 

I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 

I 








j_ 






















[ 

T B L 1 

/ 

6 

0 VS 

] 








2 








































3^ 








































4 








































5 _ 








































6^ 








































7_ 








































8 








































9 








































A 








































B 








































C 








































D 

PAN 

E 

L 

- 

1 


ADJ 


( + ) 
























L 

_ 

_ 

m 



.... 






























L 

_ 

_ 



■ Key operation 

<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL-2 ADJ (+) 
<UP> : Shifting to POWER DOWN 
<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer 


• When the screen is shifted to the next nested layer below, the item of the layer above is indicated at third line of the screen, 
and the item of the layer below is indicated at fifteenth line. 

• The configuration of the menu screen is the same for any adjustment item that has lower layers. 

• To confirm that the change in the SUS FREQ, setting has resulted in diminishing of AM radio interference in this layer, after 
changing the setting, turn the unit off then back on. 


C 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 


1 

5 

10 

15 

16 





PAN 

E 

L 


FACT. 




V D 1 

- 

1 

0 

6 

0 5 

- 

N T V 

- 

AT B 






■ Key operation 

<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item 
<UP> : Shifting to the previous item 

<RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ 
setting value 

<LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the 
adjustment/setting value 
<VOL+> : Adding by 10 to the adjustment/ 
setting value 

<VOL-> : Subtracting by 1 0 from the 
adjustment/setting value 
<SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting 





I 

_ 

... 

I 


I 

I 

_ 


I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 


I 

I 

I 

_ 

I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 

... 

I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 

_ 









PAN 

E 

L 

- 

1 


A 

D 

J 











[ 

T B L 1 

/ 

6 

0 VS 

] 








2 








































3^ 








































4 








































5 








































6 








































7 








































8 








































9 








































A 








































B 








































~C 








































D 

VOL 


OFFSET 

< 

= 

> 









1 

3 4 















E 

_ 

_ 

I 

_ 


I 

_ 

_ 

[TT 

_ 

_ 

I 

I 


_ 

I 

_ 

I 

_ 

_ 

_ 

I 

I 

I 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 







value and shifting to the upper layer 


E 


F 


PDP-501 0FD 


101 


5 


6 


7 


8 









1 


2 


3 


4 


6. 2. 2. 6 PANEL-2 AD J (+) 

• White balance can be adjusted by adjusting R, G, and B gain. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the 
next nested layer below for item selection. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PAN 

E 

L 


FACT 





V D 1 

_ 

1 

0 6 0 5 

_ 

N T V 

_ 

AT B 











_ 

_ 

I 


I 

.. 

I 

I 


I 

I 

I 


I 

_ 

_ 

I 

_ 

I 

I 

I 

_ 


_ 

_ 

I 

I 


_ 

I 

r 






























[ 

T B L 

1 

/ 

6 

0 vs 









2 








































3^ 








































4 








































5 








































6^ 








































7 








































8 








































9 








































A 








































B 








































C 








































D 

PAN 

E 

L 

- 

2 


ADJ 


( 

+ 

) 

























E 


_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

L 






■ Key operation 

<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL FUNCTION (+) 
<UP> : Shifting to PANEL-1 ADJ (+) 
<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer 


■ Key operation 



1 

5 

10 

15 

20 


25 





30 


32 

<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item 

1 





PAN 

E 

L 


FACT 





V D 1 

- 

1 

0 6 0 5 

- 

N T V 

- 

AT B 






<UP> : Shifting to the previous item 







_ 

_ 

I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 

I 


I 

I 

I 


I 

I 

_ 

_ 

_ 

I 

I 

I 


I 

I 

_ 

I 

I 

I 

_ 

_ 

L 





<RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ 
setting value 





jL 

PAN 

E 

L 

- 

2 


ADJ 











[ 

T B L 1 

/ 

6 

0 vs 

] 









2 





































5 




3 _ 





































<LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the 





4 





































adjustment/setting value 
<VOL+> : Adding by 1 0 to the adjustment/ 
setting value 





5 









































6 









































7 





































10 




8 





































<VOL-> : Subtracting by 10 from the 





9 





































adjustment/setting value 
<SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting 





A 









































B 









































C 





































value and shifting to the upper layer 

15 




D 

R 

- 

H 

1 

GH 


< 

= 

> 













0 


r 






16 




E 



_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 







_ 


_ 

_ 



_ 


_ 



t 







The ABL/WB adjustment values are grouped into up to four tables, depending on the drive sequences. The adjustment value for the 
actually driven table is displayed. The number of the adjustment table and the drive sequence currently selected are displayed on the 
right side of the third line as the On-Screen display. 

Drive sequence and adjustment table 


Sequence Name 

Video50 

Video60 

Video72 

Video75 

PC60 

Adjustment Value 
Table 

TBL2 

TBL1 

TBL1 

TBL3 

TBL4 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


102 


i 


2 


3 


4 









5 


6 


7 


8 


6. 2.2.7 PANEL FUNCTION (+) 

• A setting for panel degradation correction can be made. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next 
nested layer below for item selection. 






PANEL 


FACT 





V D 1 

- 

i 

0 

6 0 5 

- 

NT V 

- 

AT B 











I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 

I 


I 

I 

I 

_ 

_ 

I 

I 

I 

r 


I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 



I 

I 

_ 

_ 

I 

I 

I 








1_ 






















[ 

T B L 

1 

/ 

6 

0 V s 

] 








2 








































3^ 








































4_ 








































5 _ 








































6^ 








































7 








































8^ 








































9 








































A 








































B 
















































































D 

PANEL 


FUNCT 

1 

ON 


( 

+ 

) 






















E 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

L 


_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 






Key operation 


<DOWN> 

<UP> 

<SET> 


Shifting to ETC.(+) 

Shifting to PANEL-2 ADJ (+) 
Shifting to the next nested layer 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PANEL 


FACT 





ni 

_ 

i 

0 

6 0 5 

_ 

N T V 

_ 

■tb 











I 

_ 

I 

I 

_ 

_ 

_ 

I 

I 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 


r 

_ 

_ 

I 

I 


_ 

I 



I 

_ 

_ 

_ 

I 

I 








jL 

PANEL 


FUNCT 

1 

ON 








[ 

T B L 

i 

/ 

6 

0 V s 

] 








2 








































3^ 








































4 








































5 








































6 








































7 








































8 








































9 








































A 








































B 








































C 








































D 

R 

- 

L 

E 

V 

E L 


< 

= 

> 












L V 

- 

3 














Y 







_ 





_ 

_ 


I 


L 

_ 


_ 

_ 



_ 





_ 









■ Key operation 

<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item 
<UP> : Shifting to the previous item 
<RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ 
setting value 

<LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the 
adjustment/setting value 
<SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting 
value and shifting to the upper layer 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


103 


5 


6 


7 


8 









1 


2 


3 


4 


6 .2.2.8 ETC. (+) 

• The setting about the backup of panel adjusting value and various data on panel operational information can be cleared. 
Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 



■ Key operation 

<DOWN> : Shifting to RASTER MASK SETUP 

(+) 

<UP> : Shifting to PANEL FUNCTION (+) 
<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PAN 

E 

L 


FACT 





V D 1 

_ 

1 

0 6 0 5 

_ 

N T V 

_ 

A*fB 












I 


I 

I 

_ 

I 

I 

I 


_ 

_ 

I 

I 

I 


_ 

_ 

I 

I 


_ 

_ 

I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 

I 

L 








X 

3 



















[ 

T B L 

1 

/ 

6 

0 V s 

] 








2 








































3_ 








































4 








































5 








































6 








































7 








































8 








































9 








































A 








































B 








































cT 








































D 

BACKUP 


DATA 


< 

= 

> 








NO 


O P R T 











E~ 



_ 



_ 








_ 

_ 

_ 



I 

_ 

_ 





_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


L 






■ Key operation 


<DOWN> : Shifting to the next item 
<UP> : Shifting to the previous item 
<RIGHT> : Adding by one to the adjustment/ 
setting value 

<LEFT> : Subtracting by one from the 
adjustment/setting value 
<SET> : Determining the adjustment/setting 
value and shifting to the upper layer 


o 


E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


104 


i 


2 


3 


4 








5 


6 


7 


8 


6. 2.2. 9 RASTER MASK SETUP (+) A 

•This menu set the RASTER MASK and the drive sequence at RASTER MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key 
shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PANEL 


FACT 





V D 1 

- 

i 

0 

6 0 5 

- 

NT V 

- 

AT B 











I 

I 

I 

I 


I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 

_ 

I 

I 

I 

r 


I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 



I 

I 

_ 

_ 

I 

I 

I 








1_ 






















[ 

T B L 

1 

/ 

6 

0 V S 

] 








2 








































3^ 








































4_ 








































5 _ 








































6^ 








































7 








































8^ 








































9 








































A 








































B 
















































































D 

RASTER 


MASK 


SETUP 


( 

+ 

) 



















E 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

L 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 






■ Key operation 

<DOWN> : Shifting to PATTERN MASK SETUP 
(+) 

<UP> : Shifting to ETC. (+) 

<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PANEL 


FACT 





V D 1 

_ 

i 

0 

6 0 5 

_ 

N T V 

_ 

AT B 











_ 

I 

_ 

I 


I 

I 

_ 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 

_ 

r 

I 

I 

I 

_ 


I 

I 

_ 

I 

_ 

I 


I 

I 

_ 








jL 

RASTER 


MASK 


SETUP 





[ 

T B L 

1 

/ 

6 

0 V S 

] 








2 








































3^ 








































4 








































5 








































6 








































7 








































8 








































9 








































A 








































B 








































C 








































D 

RST 


MASK 


0 1 












6 0V 















e~ 


_ 

_ 


_ 



_ 

_ 


_ 


_ 




L 

_ 


_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 







■ Key operation 


<DOWN> 

<UP> 

<RIGHT> 

<LEFT> 

<SET> 


Shifting to the next MASK 
Shifting to the previous MASK 
Changing MASK sequence (+) 
Changing MASK sequence (-) 
Determining the adjustment/setting 
value and shifting to the upper layer 


• The MASK indication sequence can be changed among 48V, 50V, 60V, 72V, 75 V and 60P using the Right or 
Left key. The selected sequence and the ABL/WB table are retained until the mask is turned off. 


E 


F 


PDP-501 0FD 


105 


5 


6 


7 


8 









1 


2 


3 


4 


6.2.2.10 PATTERN MASK SETUP (+) 

•This menu set the PATTERN MASK and the drive sequence at PATTERN MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key 
shifts the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PAN 

E 

L 


FACT 





V D 1 

_ 

1 

0 6 0 5 

_ 

N T V 

_ 

AT B 











_ 

_ 

I 

I 

I 


.. 

I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 

_ 

I 

_ 

_ 

I 

_ 

I 

I 

I 

_ 


_ 

_ 

I 

I 


_ 

I 

r 






























[ 

T B L 

1 

/ 

6 

0 VS 

] 








2 








































3^ 








































4 








































5 








































6^ 








































7 








































8 








































9 








































A 








































B 








































C 








































D 

PATTERN 


MASK 


SETUP 


( 

+ 

) 


















E 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 



_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

__ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

L 






■ Key operation 

<DOWN> : Shifting to COMBI MASK SETUP (+) 
<UP> : Shifting to RASTER MASK SETUP (+) 
<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PAN 

E 

L 


FACT 





V D 1 

_ 

i 

0 6 0 5 

_ 

N T V 

_ 

AT B 












z 

I 


I 

I 

_ 

I 

_ 

_ 



i 

_ 

_ 

_ 




I 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

I 

_ 

I 

r 








jL 

PATTERN 


MASK 


SETUP 




[ 

T B L 1 

/ 

6 

0 VS 

] 








2 








































3^ 








































4 








































5 








































6 








































7 








































8 








































9 








































A 








































B 








































C 








































D 

P TN 


MASK 


0 1 












6 0V 















E 


_ 


_ 


_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 



_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 


_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

L 






■ Key operation 


<DOWN> 

<UP> 

<RIGHT> 

<LEFT> 

<SET> 


Shifting to the next MASK 
Shifting to the previous MASK 
Changing MASK sequence (+) 
Changing MASK sequence (-) 
Determining the adjustment/setting 
value and shifting to the upper layer 


• The MASK indication sequence can be changed among 48V, 50V, 60V, 72V, 75V and 60P using the Right or 
Left key. The selected sequence and the ABL/WB table are retained until the mask is turned off. 


E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


106 


i 


2 


3 


4 









5 


6 


7 


8 


6.2.2.11 COMBI MASK SETUP (+) A 

• This menu set the COMBI MASK and the drive sequence at COMBI MASK state. Pressing the ENTER/SET key shifts 
the screen to the next nested layer below for item selection. 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PANEL 


FACT 





V D 1 

- 

i 

0 

6 0 5 

- 

NT V 

- 

AT B 











I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 



I 


I 

r 


I 

I 

I 

I 

_ 



I 

I 

_ 

_ 

I 

I 

I 








1_ 






















[ 

T B L 

1 

/ 

6 

0 V s 

] 








2 








































3^ 








































4_ 








































5 _ 








































6^ 








































7 








































8^ 








































9 








































A 








































B 








































<2 








































D 

COMB 

1 


MASK 


SETUP 


< 

+ 

) 




















E 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 


_ 

L 


_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 






■ Key operation 

<DOWN> : Shifting to PANEL INFORMATION 
<UP> : Shifting to PATTERN MASK SETUP 
(+) 

<SET> : Shifting to the next nested layer 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PANEL 


FACT 





ilia 

_ 

i 

0 

6 0 5 

_ 

N T V 

_ 

AT B 











_ 

I 

I 


_ 

I 

I 

_ 

I 

L 


I 

.. 


_ 

r 

I 

I 

I 

_ 


I 

I 

_ 

I 

_ 

I 


I 

I 

_ 








jL 

COMB 

1 


MASK 


SETUP 






[ 

T B L 

1 

/ 

6 

0 V s 

] 








2 








































3^ 








































4 








































5 








































6 








































7 








































8 








































9 








































A 








































B 








































C 








































D 

CMB 


MASK 


0 1 












6 0V 















E~ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

L 






L 

_ 


_ 

_ 


_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 


_ 







■ Key operation 


<DOWN> 

<UP> 

<RIGHT> 

<LEFT> 

<SET> 


Shifting to the next MASK 
Shifting to the previous MASK 
Changing MASK sequence (+) 
Changing MASK sequence (-) 
Determining the adjustment/setting 
value and shifting to the upper layer 


• The MASK indication sequence can be changed among 48V, 50V, 60V, 72V, 75 V and 60P using the Right or 
Left key. The selected sequence and the ABL/WB table are retained until the mask is turned off. 


E 


F 


PDP-501 0FD 


107 


5 


6 


7 


8 









1 


2 


3 


4 


6.2.3 OPTION 


Operation item 


No. 

Function 

Content 

RS-232C 

6.2.3.1 

EDID WRITE MODE <=> 

DISABLE <=> ENABLE 

— 

6.2. 3.2 

ANTENNA MODE <=> 

CABLE <=> AIR 

— 

6. 2. 3. 3 

AFT <=> 

OFF <=> ON (Controls AFT action) 

— 

6. 2. 3. 4 

SYNC DET (+) 

Exclusively used for technical analysis 

— 

6.2. 3.5 

CC (+) 

Exclusively used for technical analysis 

— 


6.2.3. 1 EDID WRITE MODE <=> 

Exclusively used for production line. 


6.2.3.2 ANTENNA MODE <=> 

Exclusively used for production line. 


c 


6. 2. 3.3 AFT <=> 

Exclusively used for production line. 


6.2.3.4 SYNC DET (+) 

Exclusively used for technical analysis (details omitted). 


6.2.3.5 CC (+) 

Exclusively used for technical analysis (details omitted). 


o 


E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


108 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


6.2.4 INITIALIZE 

Operation item 


No. 

Function 

Content 

RS-232C 

6.2.4. 1 

SIDE MASK LEVEL (+) 

Configure the color of the side mask. 

SML 

6. 2.4. 2 

FINAL SETUP (+) 

Initialize flash memorys on virgin product status 

FST 

6. 2.4. 3 

HMG/HG SERVICE MODE 

Enter HMG/HG SERVICE MODE 

— 

6. 2.4. 4 

Wide XGA AUTO <=> 

Exclusively used for technical analsyis. 

— 


Note: When there is an altered history due to an open TRAP SW, if the "DISPLAY" key is held for at least 
5 seconds on the above menu, the altered history will be cleared and the unit will be back to normal. 


6. 2.4.1 SIDE MASK LEVEL (+) 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 






1 N 1 

T 

1 A L 

1 Z E 

V D 1 

- 

3 0 6 0 1 

- 

NT V 

- 

AH B 

















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































S 

1 D E 

MASK 

L E V E 

L 

( 

+ 

) 














To configure sidemask level (To adjust the values, input signal is required). 


B 


C 


Display 

Content 

RS-232C 

SIDE MASK LEVEL <=> 

Adjust Side Mask level (Adjustable range: 000 to 255) 

SML 


6. 2.4.2 FINAL SETUP (+) ° 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 



• To reset each memory values to factory default values. Factory command is "FST". I 

• When the configuration is set to <NO> and the [ENTER/SET] key is pressed, no action is taken and the menu returns to 
previous screen. 

• When the configuration is set to <YES> and the [ENTER/SET] key is pressed for 5 seconds, the reset action executes. 

Be sure to disconnect and connect the AC cable after FINAL SETUP. 

When replacing the MAIN Assy, the FINAL SETUP is required. 


PDP-501 0FD 


109 


5 


6 


7 


8 








1 


2 


3 


4 


6.2. 4.3 HMG/HG SERVICE MODE 


A 


B 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 





- 

1 N 

1 T 

1 

A L 

i 

Z E 




V 

D 

1 

- 

3 

0 

6 

0 

1 

- 

P 

B 

R 

- 

A 

H 

B 











X 


X 







I 

I 

I 



I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 


I 









HMG/ 

H 

G 

s 

E R 

V 

1 

o 

m 


M 

O 

D 

E 














































































































































































































































































































































































































































































1 

B 

B 



s 

a 

1 

F 

T 


< 

= 

> 









Y 

E 

s 

























_ 











_ 






_ 











The value of all memorized data are set to shipment status. 

If the [ENTER] key is kept on pressing for 5 second when the status of this menu is <YES>, HMG/HG SERVICE mode will be done. 


I For ELITE model 

Be sure to do above procedure at input fuction except HMG. 
For details, refer to the service manual for the ELITE model. 


c ■ HG (Home Gallery) SERVICE MODE (Regular model) 

1 . Home Gallery Screen 

(1)When the USB device is connected 


PTP Support : Enabled 

T: Bus=01Lev=01Prnt=C1Port=00Cnt=01Dev«= 3Spd=12 MxCh= 0 

D: Ver= I K) Cls=00<>lfc ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 1 

P: Vendor=054c ProdlD=004e Rev= 150 

S: Manufacturer=Sony 

S: Product=Sony PTP 

C:* #lfs= 1 Cfg«= 1 Atr=c0 MxPwr= 2mA 

I: lf#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 3 Cls=06(8til) Sub=01 Prot=01 Drlver=(none) 

E: Ad=01(O) Atr=02(BuBO MxPS= 64 Iv1=0m8 
E: Ad=82(l) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 64 IvUOme 
E: Ad=83(i) Atr»03(lnt ) MxPS« 8 Ivl»10m8 


E 


F 


(2) When the USB device is not connected 


PTP Support Enabled 
Not Connected 


PDP-501 0FD 


110 


1 


2 


3 


4 








5 


6 


7 


8 


(3) Each item explanation (Example) 


PTP Support : Disabled 


T: Bus=03 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 2 Spd=480 MxCh= 0 

D: Ver= 2.00 Cls=00(>ifc ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1 

P: Vendor=Odda ProdlD=2026 Rev= 1.4f 

S: Manufacturer=ICSI 

S: Product=USB2.0 Card Reader 

S: SerialNumber=0000001 

C:* #lfs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=80 MxPwr=500mA 

I: lf#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=08(stor.) Sub=06 Prot=50 Driver=usb-storage 
E: Ad=82(l) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 lvl=0ms 
E: Ad=01(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 lvl=0ms 


© PTP Support 


Disable 

PTP Non-Suooort 

Strinq 

Enable 

PTP Support 

Strinq 


© T (Topology info) 


Bus 

Bus Number 

Decimal 

Lev 

Level in toooloav for this bus 

Decimal 

Prnt 

Parent Device Number 

Decimal 

Port 

Connector/Port on Parent for this device 

Decimal 


Cnt 

Count of devices at this level 

Decimal 

Dev# 

Device Number 

Decimal 

Spd 

Device Soeed in Mbps 

Decimal 

MxCh 

Max Children 

Decimal 


® C (Configuration descriptor info) 


#lfs 

Number of Interfaces 

Decimal 

#Cfq 

Confiquration Number 

Decimal 

Atr 

Attributes 

Hexadecimal 

MxPwr 

MaxPower in mA 

Decimal 


® I (Interface descriptor info) 


If# 

Interface Number 

Decimal 

Alt 

Alternate Settinq Number 

Decimal 

#Eos 

Number of Endpoints 

Decimal 

CIs 

Interface Class 

Hexadecimal(Strina) 

Sub 

Interface Sub Class 

Hexadecimal 

Prot 

Interface Protocol 

Hexadecimal 

Driver 

Driver name 

Strinq 


© D (Device descriptor info) 


Ver 

Device USB version 

Hexadecimal 

CIs 

Device Class 

Hexadecimal 

Sub 

Device Sub Class 

Hexadecimal 

Prot 

Device Protocol 

Hexadecimal 

MxPS 

Max Packet Size of Default Endpoint 

Decimal 

#Cfqs 

Number Confiqurations 

Decimal 


© P (Product ID info) 


Vendor 

Vendor ID code 

Hexadecimal 

ProdID 

Product ID code 

Hexadecimal 

Rev 

Product revision number 

Hexadecimal 


© S (String descriptor info - 1) 

Manufacturer! I String 


© S (String descriptor info - 2) 

iProduct | IStrinq 


® E (Endpoint descriptor info) C 


® E (Endpoint descriptor info) 


Ad 

Endpoint Address (l=ln, 0=0ut) 

Hexadecimal(Strinq) 

Atr 

Attributes 

Hexadecimal(Strina) 

MxPS 

Endpoint Max Packet Size 

Decimal 

Ivl 

Interval (max) between transfers 

Decimal 


© S (String descriptor info - 3) 

|SerialNumber| | String 


2. End method 

It is the same as the case that Home Gallery displays. 


E 


6.2.4. 4 Wide XGA AUTO <=> 

Exclusively used for technical analsyis (details omitted). 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


5 


6 


7 


8 





1 


2 


3 


4 


7. DISASSEMBLY 

7.1 FLOWCHART OF REMOVAL ORDER FOR THE MAIN PARTS AND BOARDS 


A 


Note: Even if the unit shown in the photos and illustrations in this manual may differ from your product, the procedures 
described here are common. 


Flowchart of removal order for the main parts and boards 


It is efficient to proceed with removal of the main parts and boards in the order shown in the chart below: 


□ 

□ 

□ 

Power Button 

Side input 

Function button 

Case (508F) 

cover 

panel 


Rear case (508F) 


□ 


SIDE KEY 


FHD FAN 

FHD 

Fan Holder 

CONNECT 

POWER SW 

(Upper central part) 


POWER 

SUPPLY 


B 


B 


Side input 
panel (8U) 


SIDE IO 


B 


Side input 
shield 


Function button 
shield 


50F 

X DRIVE 



/ 




/ 


50F 

Y DRIVE 


POD 


H 1 


POD stay A 


MAIN 


Front case Assy 
(508FU) 


Terminal panel B 
(50U) 


□ 




Multi base 
Section 


Terminal panel A 
(U) 


□ 


50FHD LED 


FHD RLS 


FHD IR 


Front Chassis FIT (508F) Assy, 
Front Chassis FIB Assy (50), 
Panel holder VI (50), V2 (50), 
Front chassis VL (508F) 


50F 

PANEL 


TANSHI 



DIGITAL 

SENSOR 







50F 

50F 

50F 

50F 

SCAN A 

SCAN B 

SCAN C 

SCAN D 


112 


PDP-5010FD 
















5 


6 


7 


8 


7.2 DISASSEMBLY 


A 


Disassembly 


| Speaker System 



* 


PDP-5010FD 


c 


D 


E 





1 


2 


3 


4 




SIDE KEY Assy 


t 

Function button panel 

ffl. / (D 


114 


PDP-5010FD 


■ Tightening sequence for the screws 
when assembling 

When assembling the rear case (508F), tighten 
the screws in the following sequence: 

(T) Tighten the two screws. 

( 2 ) Tighten three screws. 

(( 3 ) Tighten the two screws. 

(4) Tighten the eight screws. 

( 5 ) Tighten other screws. 


Rear case (508F) 


Disassembly 


Rear Case (508F) 


• Function button panel 

(T) Remove the two screws. 

( 2 ) Remove the function button panel. 

• Side input cover 

( 3 ) Remove the two screws. 

( 4 ) Remove the side input cover. 

• Power button case (508F) 

( 5 ) Remove the two screws. 

(6) Remove the power button case. 


• Rear case (508F) 

(T) Remove the 20 screws. (AMZ30P060FTB) 

( 2 ) Remove the 10 screws. (TBZ40P080FTB) 

( 3 ) Remove the two screws. (ABA1332) 

(4) Remove the one screw. (ABA1341) 

( 5 ) Remove the rear case (508F). 









5 


6 


7 


8 


H Access to PCB Assys 


• SIDE 10 Assy 

(T) Remove the four screws. 

(2) Remove the two screws. 

(3) Remove the four screws. 

(4) Remove the side input panel (8U). 

• 50F X DRIVE Assy 

(T) Remove the two screws. 

(2) Remove the side input shield with PCB. 

(3) Diagnose the 50F X DRIVE Assy. 

• 50FY DRIVE Assy 

(T) Remove the two screws. 

(2) Remove the function button shield with PCB. 

(3) Diagnose the 50F Y DRIVE Assy. 


■ For 50F X DRIVE Assy 

Side input shield 


■ For SIDE IO Assy 

SIDE IO Assy 



•For 50FY DRIVE Assy 

Function button shield SIDE KEY Assy 




Caution: 

As the two capacitors on the 50F Y DRIVE Assy are located very close to 
sub frame L Assy 507, if the former Assy is tilted toward the latter Assy 
when disassembling, they may come into contact with the latter Assy. 
Therefore, before removing the 50F Y DRIVE Assy, be sure to tilt the 
capacitors, as shown in the photo (away from sub frame L Assy 507). 


FHD FAN CONNECT 



50F Y DRIVE Assy 



Sub frame L Assy 507 


Capacitor 


FHD POWER 
SW Assy 


Note: 

When removing the POWER 
SUPPLY Unit, be sure to remove 
not only the POWER SUPPLY 
Unit but entire PCB base. 

- } ' — ■ POWER SUPPLY 

yj| unit 

-• rjt - — PCB base 

t lT T --~ 


m ^ —ir j ^ 'ifl 


I Styling of jumper wires around the FAN motor 



PDP-5010FD 


115 






1 


2 


3 


4 


A 


C 


□ 


E 


• MAIN Assy 

(T) Disconnect cables, connectors, as required. 

(2) Remove the two screws. 

(3) Remove the two screws. 

(4) Remove the POD cover. 

(5) Remove the POD stay A with PCB. 

■ How to remove the bridge connector 
connecting between the MAIN and 
TANSHI Assys 

(1 ) Grip the two short edges of the connector with 
longnose pliers. 

(2) Insert a finger between the longnose pliers and 
the board to protect the board and the mounted 
parts on the board from accidental damage by 
the pliers then, using your finger as a fulcrum and 
the pliers as a lever, pry the connector upward to 
remove it. 




□ Terminal Panel B (50U) 



(T) Remove the four screws. 

(2) Remove the two screws. 

(3) Remove the 1 0 screws. 

(4) Remove the four screws. 

(5) Remove the terminal panel B (50U). 


— Note: 

The wiring shown in the photo is different from 
the actual wiring, because the product in the 
photo is a prototype. 

Upon servicing, be sure to restore the original 
wiring of the unit after repair work. 



TANSHI 


Terminal panel B (50U) 
Terminal panel A (U) 


■ Tightening sequence for the screws when assembling 

When assembling the terminal panel B (50U), tighten 
the screws in the following sequence: 

(T) Tighten the screw. 

(2) Tighten the screw. 

(3) Tighten other screws. 



PDP-501 OFD 


116 


1 


2 


3 


4 




5 


6 


7 


8 


Front Case Assy (508FU) 


(T) Remove the four rivets. 


I Pull the lower part of the Front case Assy (508FU) 
toward you and out. 

I Remove the Front case Assy (508FU), by pulling 
it upward. 


Front case Assy (508FU) 




Rivet 


Turn it not to press the rivet. 

(Because when the rivet presses, fit in once again.) 


X i- 

® 

© 


a 

® 1 


( 1 ) 

( 1 ) 



( 1 ) 


t 


1 


When assembling the front case, 
tighten this rivet first. 


Front side 


PDP-5010FD 


117 



1 


2 


3 


4 


B Access to 50F DIGITAL Assy 


(T) Disconnect the cable. 

(2) Remove the two screws. 

(3) Remove the four screws. 


(^) Lift the Multi base section to the direction of the 


arrow. 


Multi base section 



® * ».vX*X » I . M fr • -X v * * _Q 

••••••••••••••••••• • • * 



Multi base section 


* ■ 


/ 


i ■■■ ■ ■■;■■■■■■ 



Multi base section 


PANEL SENSOR Assy 



50 F DIGITAL Assy 


118 


PDP-5010FD 






5 


6 


7 


8 


□ Exchange of SCAN 1C 


• Front chassis HT (508F) Assy 

( 7 ) Remove the four screws. 

(2) Remove the two screws. 

(3) Remove the front chassis HT (508F) Assy. 



Front chassis HT (508F) Assy 



• Front chassis HB Assy (50) 

(T) Disconnect the two jumper wires. 

(2) Remove the one screw. 

((3) Remove the FHD RLS Assy. 

(4) Remove the two screws. 

(5) Remove the two screws. 

(6) Remove the two screws. 

(7) Remove the front chassis HB Assy (50). 



FHD IR 

Assy 


FHD RLS Assy 


50FHD LED Assy 



• Panel holder VI (50), V2 (50) 

(T) Remove the two screws. 

(2) Unhook the six hooks. 

(3) Remove the panel holders VI (50) and V2 (50). 




PDP-501 0FD 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


5 


6 


7 


8 




©(§)© 


1 


2 


3 


4 


A 


• Front chassis VL (508F) 

Loosen the jumper wire. 

Remove the three screws. 

Remove the front chassis VL (508F). 


Exchange 



50 F SCAN A 50F SCAN B 50F SCAN C 50F SCAN D 
Assy Assy Assy Assy 


0 


Notes for Three pieces connector 40P* 

Three pieces connector 40P is a precision part. Pay attention to the handling. 


Connecting Method 



Disconnecting Method 


In addition, please do not touch the electrode plane. 





F 


120 


PDP-5010FD 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


7.3 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS FOR SPEAKER SYSTEM 


SERVICE PRECAUTIONS 

Be careful in handling this product, because scratches on cabinet coating are easily noticeable. 
When working on this unit, be sure to place the cabinet on a piece of soft cloth for protection. 


A 


(1) Grille Assy 

The Grille Assy is secured to the baffle plate with two-sided tape 
and bosses. When removing the Grille Assy, it is necessary to 
wear cotton gloves. 


# Disassembly 

1 . Insert the tip of your gloved finger into the gap between the 
Grille Assy in front and the comer of the baffle plate so that 
the Grille Assy is slightly lifted. 



2. Insert the gloved finger to the extent of the second joint into 
the gap between the cabinet and the Grille Assy. 




3. Alternately and gradually lift the left and right sides of the 
Grille Assy by about 5 cm, sliding gloved fingers along the 
cabinet. When lifting the Grille Assy, be sure to lift the left and 
right sides alternately, but not both sides simultaneously. 



# Reassembly 

Remove the old two-sided tape attached to the rear side of the 
Grille Assy and the front side of the baffle, and adhere new 
two-sided tape. Press the bosses into the baffle plate and press the 
entire grill into position. 

(Press the bosses from the woofer frame.) 

(2) Woofer (Disassembly) 

The woofer is secured to the baffle plate with four screws from 
the inside. To remove the woofer, first remove the baffle plate. 

# Reassembly 

When reassembling the woofer, place it so that its © terminal is 
suitable for the inside. Tighten the screws to the baffle. 


(3) Tweeter (Disassembly) 

The tweeter is secured to the baffle plate with two screws from 

the inside. To remove the tweeter, first remove the baffle plate. C 

# Reassembly 

When reassembling the tweeter, © terminal is in the topside. 


Network Assy (Caution) 

When removing the Network Assy, pull it out a little at a time 
from alternate sides, because it is seated tightly. 



Note: Be careful not to bend the Grille Assy too far. 
Otherwise, it may be damaged. 

OK: Good example NG: Bad example 


r 


OK 


V. 

r 


NG 


V 



Baffle 







Baffle Assy (Caution) 

When reassembling the cabinet and the baffle plate, secure the 
screws in the order shown in the figure below: 



Rear 


PDP-501 OFD 


E 


F 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


8. EACH SETTING AND ADJUSTMENT 



1. At shipment, the unit is adjusted to its best conditions. Normally, it is not necessary to readjust even if an assembly is replaced. If the 
adjustment is shifted or if it becomes necessary to readjust because of part replacement, etc., perform the adjustment as described below. 

2. Any value changed in Service/Factory mode will be stored in memory as soon as it is changed. Before readjustment, take note of the 
original values for reference in case you need to restore the original settings. 

3. Use a stable AC power supply. 


B 8.1 ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED WHEN THE UNIT IS REPAIRED OR REPLACED 


■ When any of the following assemblies is replaced 


POWER SUPPLY Unit wb 

Refer to “8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA” and 
“8.6 PRECAUTION ON REPLACEMENT OF THE 
POWER SUPPLY UNIT”. 




DIGITAL Assy ^ 

' “ ^ 

Writing of backup data is required. 

Refer to the “8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM 
(DIGITAL ASSY)”. 




X DRIVE Assy 

No adjustment required 


Y DRIVE Assy ^ 

No adjustment required 


Service Panel Assy j 

Refer to “8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA” and 
“8.4 ADJUSTMENTS WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL 
ASSY IS REPLACED”. 




MAIN Assy (*) ^ 

No adjustment required 


PANEL SENSOR Assy ^ 

Writing of backup data is required. 

Refer to the “8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM 
(DIGITAL ASSY)”. 




Other assemblies 

No adjustment required 


E 


F 


Note: Checking the Cable Card ID 

The PDP has a slot for a cable card that is used for managing your 
information by the cable TV company. The following procedure 
allows you to check your Cable Card ID and the Host ID. 

1. Press HOME MENU. 

2. Select “Tuner Setup”. (4/4- then ENTER) 

3. Select “Channel Setup”. ( 4 / 4 then ENTER) 

4. Select “POD ID”. ( 4 / 4 ) 

•The Host ID and Cable Card ID appear. 

5. Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. 


(*) : When replacing the MAIN Assy, be sure to perform the FINAL SETUP. 


PDP-5010FD 


122 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


A 

Notes on replacing parts 

For the parts described in the list below, replacement is required for the whole Assy, not only the defective part. 

If any part listed below is identified as defective and needs replacement, replace the whole Assy, and make necessary 
adjustments after replacement. 

Reason: The whole Assy must be replaced, because adjustments and data rewriting for the Assy at the level of production I 

line are required. 


PCB Assy No. 

Assy Name 

Parts that Require Whole-Assy Replacement 

Ref No. 

Function Name 

Part No. 



IC4601 

AV switch 

R2S1 1006FT 



IC4701 

RGB switch 

R2S1 1001 FT 



IC4703 

EEPROM 

BR24L01AFJ-W 

AWV2457 

MAIN Assy 

IC4801 

MAIN VDEC 

CM0048BF 

IC5001 

A/D Converter 

AD9985KSTZ-1 10 



IC5102 

EEPROM 

BR24L02FV-W 



IC5103 

EEPROM 

BR24L02FV-W 



IC5104 

EEPROM 

BR24L02FV-W 



IC5203 

EEPROM 

BR24L02FV-W 



IC6401 

SYSTEM 1C 

BCM7038KPB1 G-B2 



IC6602 

DDR SDRAM 

K4H561 638H-UCB3 



IC6603 

DDR SDRAM 

K4H561 638H-UCB3 



IC6604 

DDR SDRAM 

K4H561 638H-UCB3 



IC6605 

DDR SDRAM 

K4H561 638H-UCB3 



IC6902 

Flash ROM 

AGC1057 



IC8204 

Flash ROM 

AGC1049 



IC8301 

Flash UCOM 

AGC1037 



IC8602 

Flash ROM 

AGC1039 

AWV2510 

50F X DRIVE Assy 

• Parts of X D-D CON BLOCK 

AWV251 1 

50FY DRIVE Assy 

• Parts of Y MAIN D-D CON BLOCK 1 

• Parts of Y MAIN D-D CON BLOCK 2 


POWER SUPPLY Unit ^ 

• 

The assembly must be replaced as a unit, and no 
part replacement is allowed. 



MAIN Assy j 

No adjustment is required after replacement of parts 
other than those mentioned above. 

DIGITAL Assy ^ 

No adjustment is required after replacement of parts 
other than those mentioned above. 


No adjustment is required after replacement of parts 
other than those shown in “8.5 ADJUSTMENTS 
WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED. 

X DRIVE Assy 





No adjustment is required after replacement of parts 
other than those shown in “8.5 ADJUSTMENTS 
WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED. 

Y DRIVE Assy 




ADDRESS Assy 

No adjustment required 



PANEL SENSOR Assy 

No adjustment is required after replacement of parts 
other than those mentioned above. 

TANSHI Assy ^ 

No adjustment required 


PDP-501 OFD 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


8.2 BACKUP OF THE EEPROM (DIGITAL ASSY) 


■ Outline 

Adjustment data are stored in the EEPROM (4K) on the DIGITAL Assy in the production process. Those adjustment data are 
also automatically stored in the EEPROM (for backup) on the PANEL SENSOR Assy. 

If the DIGITAL Assy is replaced, those adjustment data for backup can be copied from the EEPROM on the PANEL SENSOR 
Assy to a new DIGITAL Assy. 

I 

■ Backed up data 

• Drive voltage adjustment value 

• Hour-meter count 

• Pulse-meter count 

B • Panel white balance adjustment value 


• Serial No. 

• Drive waveform adjustment value 

• P-ON counter value 

• PD/SD histories 


■ How to copy backup data 

1. When the DIGITAL Assy is replaced with one for service (usual service) 

Adjustment data can be restored by copyinq the data backed up in the PANEL SENSOR Assy to the EEPROM on a new 
DIGITAL Assy. 

The EEPROM on the new DIGITAL Assy has no adjustment data, and the EEPROM for backup in the PANEL SENSOR Assy 
has adjustment data. After replacing the DIGITAL Assy, enter PANEL FACT, mode, display the PANEL INFORMATION page, 
then check if "NO DATA!" is set for "DIG. EEP" and "ADJUSTED" is set for "BACKUP". Then, proceed in the following steps: 

(1) Copying, using the Factory menu 

© Plug in the AC cord, press the Power switch on the unit to set it to ON, then enter Standby mode. 

© Turn on the power, using the remote control unit, then enter Panel Factory mode. 

Copy the backup data, as shown in the figure below. 


PANEL INFORMATION 


Key Down 7th 



SET (5 sec) 


© Turn the power off. 

• After the DIGITAL Assy is replaced with one for service, be sure to check if "NO DATA!" is set for "DIG. EEP" on the PANEL 
INFORMATION page of the PANEL FACT. mode. 

• If copying of the backup data fails in the above procedure, the red LED lights, and the blue LED flashes, as a warning that 
no backup data were copied. 

• If both the DIGITAL and PANEL SENSOR Assys are to be replaced, first replace the PANEL SENSOR Assy, turn the unit on 
and back off again, then replace the DIGITAL Assy. 

(2) Copying, using the RS-232C commands 

© Turn on the unit, using the remote control unit or by issuing the PON command. Then issue the FAY command. 

© Issue the BCP command to transfer the data stored in the EEPROM for backup. 

© Turn the power off. 


PDP-5010FD 


124 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


A 

2. When a secondhand DIGITAL Assy that had been mounted in another product 
is to be reused 

As adjustment data for another product are already stored in the secondhand DIGITAL Assy, first delete those data then copy 
the backup data stored in the EEPROM on the PANEL SENSOR Assy. 

I 

(1) Copying, using the Factory menu 

© Plug in the AC cord, press the Power switch on the unit to set it to ON, then enter Standby mode. 

© Turn on the power, using the remote control unit, then enter Panel Factory mode. 

Copy the backup data, as shown in the figure below. 


PANEL INFORMATION 


Key Down 7th 



SET (5 sec) 


© Turn the power off. 

Note: 

If the secondhand DIGITAL Assy is mounted in the product then the unit is turned on then back off again, the data in the 
EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy are copied over the EEPROM in the PANEL SENSOR Assy. Thus the backup data can never 
be restored. During the first power-on after the DIGITAL Assy is replaced, be sure to enter Factory mode to copy the backup 
data. Or, before removing the secondhand DIGITAL Assy from the original product, delete the adjustment data on it, using the 
Factory mode (DIGITAL EEPROM: DELETE), mount it to the product to be repaired, then copy the data from the backup 
EEPROM. 


B 


C 


D 


E 


(2) Copying, using the RS-232C commands 

© Turn on the unit, using the remote control unit or by issuing the PON command. Then issue the FAY command. | 

© Issue the UAJ command to delete data stored in the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy. 

© Issue the BCP command to transfer the data stored in the EEPROM for backup. 

© Turn the power off. 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


125 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


3. In a case where normal backup data are not stored in the backup EEPROM because 
the EEPROM on the DIGITAL Assy is defective, etc., and where manually adjusted 
values are to be applied to the product 

Note: In this section, it is assumed that settings for various items have been completed, using Factory menu or RS-232C 
commands. 


(1) Method using the Factory menu 

© Set various setting/adjustment values. 
© Proceed in the following steps. 


PANEL INFORMATION 


Key Down 7th 



SET (5 sec) 


© Turn the power off. 


When a DIGITAL Assy with an EEPROM in which adjustment data are stored is mounted, this step is not required after 
manual adjustment. ("DIGITAL EEPROM: REPAIR" is not indicated.) 


(2) Method using the RS-232C commands 

Issue the FAJ command. 


E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


126 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA 


■ Clearance of various logs after the Assys are replaced 

Besides adjustment data, data on accumulated power-on time and logs on defective parts of the product are backed up. 
Some of those data must be cleared after the Assys are replaced for service. 

(1) Clearance of logs, using the RS-232C commands 


Item 

Content 

When the Panel 
is replaced 

When the POWER 
SUPPLY Unit 
is replaced 

When the Other 
parts 

is replaced 

RS-232C 

Commands 

Hour-meter 

Accumulated power-on time 

Must be cleared 

No need to be 
cleared 

No need to be 
cleared 

CHM 

Pulse-meter 

Accumulated number of pulses 
emitted 

Must be cleared 
(mandatory) 

No need to be 
cleared 

No need to be 
cleared 

CPM 

Shutdown history 

Cause of an SD and hour-meter 
count 

Must be cleared 

No need to be 
cleared 

No need to be 
cleared 

CSD 

Power-down history 

Cause of an PD and hour-meter 
count 

Must be cleared 

No need to be 
cleared 

No need to be 
cleared 

CPD 

Power-on counter 

Relay-on count 

No need to be 
cleared 

Must be cleared 
(mandatory) 

No need to be 
cleared 

CPC 

MAX TEMP 

Historical max. temperature 

Must be cleared 

Must be cleared 

Must be cleared 

CMT 


Notes: • As the pulse-meter count is used for each correction function, it must be cleared when an Assy relevant to 
correction functions is replaced. 

• When clearing logs, using the RS-232C commands, first enter Factory mode (by issuing FAY or PFY), then issue c 

the corresponding command. 

(2) Clearance of logs, using the Factory menu 

© Plug in the AC cord, press the Power switch on the unit to set it to ON, then enter Standby mode. 

© Turn on the power, using the remote control unit, then enter Panel Factory mode. 

Delete various logs, as shown in the figure below. 

■ 

PANEL INFORMATION 


Key Down 7th 



© Turn the power off. 


Right 

Right 

Right 

Right 

Right 

Right 


PD INFO. < = > : CLEAR 


SD INFO. < = > : CLEAR 


HR-MTR INFO. < = > : CLEAR 


PM/BI -B5 < = > : CLEAR 


P COUNT INFO. < = > : CLEAR 


MAX TEMP. < = > : CLEAR 


SET (5 sec) 
SET (5 sec) 
SET (5 sec) 
SET (5 sec) 
SET (5 sec) 
SET (5 sec) 


PDP-501 OFD 


D 


E 


F 


127 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


8.4 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE SERVICE PANEL ASSY IS REPLACED 


A 


After the panel is replaced with one for service, voltage margin adjustment is required. 


I [Preparation] 

Basically, voltage margin adjustment is performed using the Panel Factory menu. 

After the panel is replaced and the unit is turned on, clear the pulse meter first. 

For details on how to clear the pulse meter, see "8.3 HOW TO CLEAR HISTORY DATA". 

*1 : As various corrections are made referring to the pulse-meter count to calculate how long the panel has been used, if 
b adjustment of the panel for service is performed without clearing the pulse-meter count, proper adjustments will not be 
performed. 

*2: The drive sequence for 60-Hz video is used for adjustment. When adjustment is made using the Panel Factory menu, the 
current drive sequence is displayed on the screen, as shown in the figure below. Make sure that 60VS is always indicated 
during adjustment. 


c 


o 


1 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 






PANEL 


FACT. 





1 

N 1 

- 

3 

0 

6 

02 

- 

RG B 

- 

J H B 

r 

r 

































— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

i — 

r 








- 

1 


A 

D 

J 











[ 




I 

















■ 







2 
































J 








U m 





3 







































4 







































5 







































6 







































7 







































8 







































9 







































A 







































B 







































(T 







































D 

VOL 


OFFSET 

< 

= 

> 









1 

2 

8 










E~ 



_ 



_ 

_ 








_ 






_ 



J 






Drive sequence indication 


Example of the On-Screen display during Panel Factory mode 


[Supplement] 

| In the "PANEL-1 ADJ" layer, the Panel White Balance value is reset to default, Panel Gamma is set to Straight, Noise is set to 
OFF, LUT mode is set to ON and Reset active control is set to OFF. 

In this case, " /****" (**** represents the current drive sequence) is displayed on the third line of the On-Screen display 

during Panel Factory mode. 


If adjustment is performed using RS-232C commands, the following commands must be transmitted for preparation: 
[PAV S00] : To set panel drive mode to Factory 

[VFQ S03] : To set Drive Sequence to Video 60-Hz 

[WBI SOI] :To temporarily reset the Panel WB adjustment value to default (WBI S00 cancels this setting.) 

[PGR S00] : To set the gamma R value to that for Factory mode 

[PGG S00] : To set the gamma G value to that for Factory mode 

[PGB S00] : To set the gamma B value to that for Factory mode 

[DIZ S03] : Dither ON, L dither ON, noise OFF. 

[$1800000001] : LUT mode ON 
[$1000003F00] : Reset active control OFF. 


*: If the unit is shut down during the above adjustment flow, resend the above commands from the beginning. 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


128 


i 


2 


3 


4 








5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


■ Preparation before adjustment 

[Replacement with the panel for service is completed.] 



[To the Main flowchart (1)] 


Note: If you perform the adjustment by RS-232C commands, the following commands must be added 
before going to the main flowchart (1): 


F 


[PAV S00] 
[VFQ S03] 
[WBI SOI] 
[PGR S00] 
[PGG S00] 
[PGB S00] 

[DIZ S03] 

[SI 800000001] 
[S1000003F00] 


: To set panel drive mode to Factory 
: To set Drive Sequence to Video 60-Hz 

: To temporarily reset the Panel WB adjustment value to default (WBI S00 cancels this setting.) 
: To set the gamma R value to that for Factory mode 
: To set the gamma G value to that for Factory mode 
: To set the gamma B value to that for Factory mode 
: Dither ON, L dither ON, noise OFF. 

: LUT mode ON 
: Reset active control OFF. 


PDP-5010FD 


130 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


Main flowchart (1)...Checking VOL OFFSET 

[From Preparation] 



[To the Main flowchart (2)] 


PDP-501 OFD 


131 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


Main flowchart (2).. .Checking VOL YNOFS3/4/1 

[From the Main flowchart (1)] 



[Adjustment completed] 


132 


PDP-5010FD 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


■ Recovery flowchart (1-1).. .Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage 

[From the Main flowchart (1)] 



[To the Recovery flowchart (1-2)] 


■ Recovery flowchart (1-2).. .Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage 

[From the Main flowchart (1) / Recovery flowchart (1-1)] 


: RST MASK 10 (Pink) 





PDP-501 OFD 


133 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 



[To the Main flowchart (2)] 


■ Recovery flowchart (1-3)... Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage 


[From the Main flowchart (1) ] 



[To the Recovery flowchart (1-4)] 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


134 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


■ Recovery flowchart (1-4).. .Changing the VOL OFFSET setting voltage 


[From the Main flowchart (1) / Recovery flowchart (1-3)] 



[To the Main flowchart (2)] 


c 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


135 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


Recovery flowchart (2-1)...Changing the VOL YNOFS3/4/1 setting voltage 


[From the Main flowchart (2)] 

RST MASK 16 (Green 1023+) j 



136 


PDP-5010FD 




[Adjustment completed] 


VOLYNOFS3 final setting value 


Note: 

Make a note of this VOL YNOFS3 value. 


■ Recovery flowchart (2-2).. .Changing the VOL YNOFS3/4 setting voltage 


[From the Main flowchart (2) / Recovery flowchart (2-1)] 



[To the Recovery flowchart (2-1)] 


PDP-501 OFD 


137 



1 


2 


3 


4 


Recovery flowchart (2-3)...Changing the VOL YNOFS3/4/1 setting voltage 

[From the Main flowchart (2)] 


RST MASK 22 (Cyan 3SF) j 


Set VOL YN0FS1 to the tentative setting value. / [VY1 


Set VOL YN0FS3 to the current setting value minus 4. / [VY3 * 

I 


Set VOL YN0FS4 to the current setting value minus 4. / [VY4 



Display RST MASK 16 (Green 1023+). / [MKS S66] 

I 


Set VOL YN0FS3 to the current setting value minus 47. / [VY3 * 
Set VOL YN0FS4 to the current setting value minus 47. / [VY4 * 


Replacement of abnormal circuits or 
re-replacement of the panel required 


D ^ 

— ■— isthere erroneous discharge (abnormal dead ceTT)? 1 

Yes 

- i 

Replacement of abnormal circuits or 


^^~^^^(Check on the PANEL 1-ADJ meruU.^ — — ' 


re-replacement of the panel required 

t * 


No 


Is there erroneous discharge (abnormal dead celiyT 
JCheck on the PANEL 1-ADJ menu.] 

[No 

Set VOL YN0FS3 to the current setting value plus 23. / [VY3 1 

I 


Set VOL YN0FS4 to the current setting value plus 23. / [VY4 1 

I 


^Yes 

Replacement of abnormal circuits or 


re-replacement of the panel required 


Determine the current setting value for VOL YN0FS3 as the final value. 
Determine the current setting value for VOL YN0FS4 as the final value. 

\ 


Set VOL YN0FS1 to the final setting value of VOL YN0FS3 minus 31 . 
/ [VY1 ***] 


1 


Determine the current VOL YNOFSI setting value as the final value. 

I 

[To the Main flowchart (2)] 


VOL YNOFS3 final setting value 


Note: 

Make a note of this VOL YNOFS3 value. 


138 


PDP-5010FD 



5 


6 


7 


8 


■ Setting Voltages 


VOF 

VRP 

VY1 

VY3 

VY4 

Vvsnofs (V) 


Vvprst (V) 


Vvknofs1,2 (V) 


Vvknofs3 (V) 


Vvknofs4 (V) 


14 

000 

146 

002 

161 

001 

151 

001 

151 

001 

15 

005 

147 

003 

162 

003 

152 

003 

152 

003 

16 

Oil 

148 

005 

163 

005 

153 

005 

153 

005 

17 

016 

149 

007 

164 

008 

154 

008 

154 

008 

18 

021 

150 

009 

165 

010 

155 

010 

155 

010 

19 

027 

151 

Oil 

166 

012 

156 

012 

156 

012 

20 

032 

152 

013 

167 

014 

157 

014 

157 

014 

21 

037 

153 

014 

168 

016 

158 

016 

158 

016 

22 

043 

154 

016 

169 

018 

159 

018 

159 

018 

23 

048 

155 

018 

170 

020 

160 

020 

160 

020 

24 

053 

156 

020 

171 

022 

161 

022 

161 

022 

25 

059 

157 

022 

172 

025 

162 

025 

162 

025 

26 

064 

158 

024 

173 

027 

163 

027 

163 

027 

27 

069 

159 

025 

174 

029 

164 

029 

164 

029 

28 

075 

160 

027 

175 

031 

165 

031 

165 

031 

29 

080 

161 

029 

176 

033 

166 

033 

166 

033 

30 

085 

162 

031 

177 

035 

167 

035 

167 

035 

31 

091 

163 

033 

178 

037 

168 

037 

168 

037 

32 

096 

164 

035 

179 

040 

169 

040 

169 

040 

33 

101 

165 

036 

180 

042 

170 

042 

170 

042 

34 

107 

166 

038 

181 

044 

171 

044 

171 

044 

35 

112 

167 

040 

182 

046 

172 

046 

172 

046 

36 

117 

168 

042 

183 

048 

173 

048 

173 

048 

37 

123 

169 

044 

184 

050 

174 

050 

174 

050 

38 

128 

170 

046 

185 

052 

175 

052 

175 

052 

39 

133 

171 

047 

186 

054 

176 

054 

176 

054 

40 

139 

172 

049 

187 

057 

177 

057 

177 

057 

41 

144 

173 

051 

188 

059 

178 

059 

178 

059 

42 

149 

174 

053 

189 

061 

179 

061 

179 

061 

43 

155 

175 

055 

190 

063 

180 

063 

180 

063 

44 

160 

176 

057 

191 

065 

181 

065 

181 

065 

45 

165 

177 

058 

192 

067 

182 

067 

182 

067 

46 

171 

178 

060 

193 

069 

183 

069 

183 

069 

47 

176 

179 

062 

194 

072 

184 

072 

184 

072 

48 

181 

180 

064 

195 

074 

185 

074 

185 

074 

49 

187 

181 

066 

196 

076 

186 

076 

186 

076 

50 

192 

182 

068 

197 

078 

187 

078 

187 

078 

51 

197 

183 

069 

198 

080 

188 

080 

188 

080 

52 

203 

184 

071 

199 

082 

189 

082 

189 

082 

53 

208 

185 

073 

200 

084 

190 

084 

190 

084 

54 

213 

186 

075 

201 

086 

191 

086 

191 

086 

55 

219 

187 

077 

202 

089 

192 

089 

192 

089 

56 

224 

188 

079 

203 

091 

193 

091 

193 

091 

57 

229 

189 

080 

204 

093 

194 

093 

194 

093 

58 

235 

190 

082 

205 

095 

195 

095 

195 

095 

59 

240 

191 

084 

206 

097 

196 

097 

196 

097 

60 

245 

192 

086 

207 

099 

197 

099 

197 

099 

61 

251 

193 

088 

208 

101 

198 

101 

198 

101 

62 

255 

194 

090 

209 

104 

199 

104 

199 

104 



196 

093 

210 

106 

200 

106 

200 

106 



197 

095 

211 

108 

201 

108 

201 

108 



198 

097 

212 

110 

202 

110 

202 

110 



199 

099 

213 

112 

203 

112 

203 

112 



200 

100 

214 

114 

204 

114 

204 

114 



201 

102 

215 

116 

205 

116 

205 

116 



202 

104 

216 

118 

206 

118 

206 

118 



203 

106 

217 

121 

207 

121 

207 

121 



204 

108 

218 

123 

208 

123 

208 

123 



205 

110 

219 

125 

209 

125 

209 

125 



206 

111 

220 

127 

210 

127 

210 

127 



207 

113 

221 

129 

211 

129 

211 

129 



208 

115 

222 

131 

212 

131 

212 

131 



209 

117 

223 

133 

213 

133 

213 

133 


PDP-501 OFD 


139 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


■ Setting Voltages 


VRP 

VY1 

VY3 

VY4 

Vvprst (V) 


Vy knots 1 ,2 (V) 


Vvknofs3 (V) 


Vvknofs4 (V) 


210 

119 

224 

136 

214 

136 

214 

136 

211 

121 

225 

138 

215 

138 

215 

138 

212 

122 

226 

140 

216 

140 

216 

140 

213 

124 

227 

142 

217 

142 

217 

142 

214 

126 

228 

144 

218 

144 

218 

144 

215 

128 

229 

146 

219 

146 

219 

146 

216 

130 

230 

148 

220 

148 

220 

148 

217 

132 

231 

150 

221 

150 

221 

150 

218 

133 

232 

153 

222 

153 

222 

153 

219 

135 

233 

155 

223 

155 

223 

155 

220 

137 

234 

157 

224 

157 

224 

157 

221 

139 

235 

159 

225 

159 

225 

159 

222 

141 

236 

161 

226 

161 

226 

161 

223 

143 

237 

163 

227 

163 

227 

163 

224 

144 

238 

165 

228 

165 

228 

165 

225 

146 

239 

168 

229 

168 

229 

168 

226 

148 

240 

170 

230 

170 

230 

170 

227 

150 

241 

172 

231 

172 

231 

172 

228 

152 

242 

174 

232 

174 

232 

174 

229 

154 

243 

176 

233 

176 

233 

176 

230 

155 

244 

178 

234 

178 

234 

178 

231 

157 

245 

180 

235 

180 

235 

180 

232 

159 

246 

183 

236 

182 

236 

182 

233 

161 

247 

185 

237 

185 

237 

185 

234 

163 

248 

187 

238 

187 

238 

187 

235 

165 

249 

189 

239 

189 

239 

189 

236 

166 

250 

191 

240 

191 

240 

191 

237 

168 

251 

193 

241 

193 

241 

193 

238 

170 

252 

195 

242 

195 

242 

195 

239 

172 

253 

197 

243 

198 

243 

198 

240 

174 

254 

200 

244 

200 

244 

200 

241 

176 

255 

202 

245 

202 

245 

202 

242 

177 

256 

204 

246 

204 

246 

204 

243 

179 

257 

206 

247 

206 

247 

206 

244 

181 

258 

208 

248 

208 

248 

208 

245 

183 

259 

210 

249 

210 

249 

210 

246 

185 

260 

212 

250 

212 

250 

212 

247 

187 

261 

214 

251 

214 

251 

214 

248 

188 

262 

217 

252 

217 

252 

217 

249 

190 

263 

219 

253 

219 

253 

219 

250 

192 

264 

221 

254 

221 

254 

221 

251 

194 

265 

223 

255 

223 

255 

223 

252 

196 

266 

225 

256 

225 

256 

225 

253 

198 

267 

227 

257 

227 

257 

227 

254 

199 

268 

229 

258 

229 

258 

229 

255 

201 

269 

232 

259 

232 

259 

232 

256 

203 

270 

234 

260 

234 

260 

234 

257 

205 

271 

236 

261 

236 

261 

236 

258 

207 

272 

238 

262 

238 

262 

238 

259 

209 

273 

240 

263 

240 

263 

240 

260 

210 

274 

242 

264 

242 

264 

242 

261 

212 

275 

244 

265 

244 

265 

244 

262 

214 

276 

246 

266 

246 

266 

246 

263 

216 

277 

249 

267 

249 

267 

249 

264 

218 

278 

251 

268 

251 

268 

251 

265 

220 

279 

253 

269 

253 

269 

253 

266 

221 

280 

255 

270 

255 

270 

255 


VRP 

Vyprst (V) 


267 

223 

268 

225 

269 

227 

270 

229 

271 

231 

272 

232 

273 

234 

274 

236 

275 

238 

276 

240 

277 

242 

278 

243 

279 

245 

280 

247 

281 

249 

282 

251 

283 

253 

284 

254 


F 


140 


PDP-501 OFD 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


8.5 ADJUSTMENT WHEN THE DRIVE ASSYS ARE REPLACED 


■ Waveform adjustments required when replacing the following parts of the X DRIVE and Y DRIVE Assys. 


Assy Name 

Ref No. 

Part Name 

Part Category 

Remarks 

X DRIVE Assy 

IC1101 

PS9117AP 

Photo Coupler 


IC1104 

TND307TD 

FET Driver 


IC1204 

PS9117AP 

Photo Coupler 


IC1209 

TND307TD 

FET Driver 


Y DRIVE Assy 

IC2101 

PS9117AP 

Photo Coupler 


IC2103 

TND307TD 

FET Driver 


IC2104 

TND307TD 

FET Driver 


IC2201 

PS9117AP 

Photo Coupler 


IC2203 

TND307TD 

FET Driver 



■ TIME LAG ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTROL SIGNAL (SUS-B) 

© Measure the time lag for the SUS-U signal to the SUS-B signal. 

© Check the time lag for the SUS-B Gate signal to the SUS-U Gate siganl. 

Adjust the variable control so that the time lag of Gate becomes " time lag of input signal + a ± 5 nsec." 
Note: For details on measuring points of waveform, see the figure below. 


SUS-U signal (input to the DRIVE Assy) 




50 % of the crest value 


SUS-B signal (input to the DRIVE Assy) 




50 % of the crest value 


time lag of SUS-U and SUS-B 
ATsus-iub 



D 


E 


Time lag of SUS-U Gate and SUS-B Gate : ATsus - gub 

Adjust so that "ATsus - gub = ATsus - iub + a ± 5 nsec," using the variable 
controls shown in the table below: 


Assy 

VR 

Value of a 

X DRIVE Assy 

VR1002 

70 nsec 

Y DRIVE Assy 

VR2002 

60 nsec 


PDP-501 OFD 


141 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


■ DELAY ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTROL SIGNAL (SUS-D) 

© Measure the pulse width of the SUS-D signal. 

© Check the pulse width of the SUS-D input signal (gate terminal of Q21 11). 

Adjust the variable control so that the pulse width of the SUS-D input signal (gate terminal of Q21 11) becomes the 
same pulse width ± 5 nsec as the SUS-D signal. 

Note: • Be sure to set the Drive to OFF for adjustment. 

• For details on measuring points of waveform, see the figure below. 


SUS-D pulse width 



SUS-D pulse width 



o 


■ ■ 

SUS-D pulse width: Tsus - Dg 

Adjust so that "Tsus - Dg = Tsus - D ± 5 nsec," using the variable 
control shown in the table below: 


Assy 

VR 

Y DRIVE Assy 

VR2001 


E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


142 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


■ SUS-B ADJUSTMENT 

X DRIVE Assy 


TP1127 




A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


Y DRIVE Assy 


Adjust the pulse width (Tsus - Dg) of the SUS-D 
input signal so that it becomes "Tsus-D ± 5 nsec." 



143 


5 


6 


7 


8 






1 


2 


3 


4 


8.6 PRECAUTION ON REPLACEMENT OF THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT 


A 


■ Attachment of the housing wire 

The housing wire (J126) is attached to the P1 1 terminal of the POWER SUPPLY unit. As the housing wire is not provided with 
the POWER SUPPLY unit for service, when replacing the POWER SUPPLY unit, remove the housing wire (J126) from the old 
one and attach it to the new one. 

NEVER turn on the unit before replacement, as doing so may damage the PC boards or the product. 

— Note: 

The wiring shown in the photo is different from the actual power supply unit, because the product in the 
photo is a prototype. 


POWER SUPPLY unit 




Disconnect the housing wire (J126) from the P1 1 terminal 
on the old POWER SUPPLY Unit. 


( 2 ) Connect the housing wire (J126) to the P1 1 terminal 
on the new POWER SUPPLY Unit. 


E 



Housing wire (J126) 


POWER SUPPLY unit (old) 


POWER SUPPLY unit (new) 


144 


PDP-5010FD 



Housing wire (J126) 






5 


6 


7 


8 


9. RS-232C 

9.1 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND 

9.1.1 PREPARED TOOLS 

A 

It is necessary to prepare the following one to use 232C command. 

•PC 

• Application for control 

• 232C cable (straight) 

• The setting of the Com port cannot be communicated if it doesn't do correctly. 

(Please follow a set explanation of PC in the Com port) I 


B 

9.1.2 USING RS-232C COMMANDS 


Individual ports are provided for RS-232C and SR+ connectors with this model. Therefore, unlike the case of previous models, 
which required switching of exclusive operation between these connectors on the Integrator menu, switching is no longer 
required. 


c 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


145 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


9.2 LIST OF RS-232C COMMANDS 


RS-232C commands can be used in Service Factory mode. Before using RS-232C commands, it is necessary to change the factory presetting. 
See "9.1 OUTLINE OF RS-232C COMMAND". 

[Note ; If you want to see version infomation (ex. QS1 , QSE, Factory, Menu), Please see 1 0 seconds after starting.] 

■ RS-232C command list 


Command 

Name 

Function 

Active 

U-com 

Last 

Memory 

Effective only 
in Factory 
mode 

Remarks 

MDU MTB 

A 

ABL 

*** 

Adjusting the upper limit of the power 

• 


Mod 

• 


AMT 

soo 

Audio mute OFF 


• 




SOI 

Audio mute ON 


• 




APO 

s** 

ADDRESS LI, L2 setting 

• 


Mod 

• 


API 

s** 

ADDRESS L3, L4 setting 

• 


Mod 

• 


AP2 

s** 

ADDRESS U1, U2 setting 

• 


Mod 

• 


AP3 

s** 

ADDRESS U3, U4 setting 

• 


Mod 

• 


APN 

*** 

IV average pulse number setting 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

APW 

soo 

APL interlocked function: OFF 

• 



• 


SOI 

APL interlocked function: ON 

• 



• 


S02 

APL interlocked WB: ON / APL interlocked y : OFF 

• 



• 


S03 

APL interlocked WB: OFF / APL interlocked y : ON 

• 



• 


B 

BCP 


Copying the backup data in the EEPROM 

• 



• 


BHI 

*** 

User white balance : BLUE highlight 

• 




UP7DN* is not effective 

BLW 

*** 

User white balance : BLUE lowlight 

• 




UP7DN* is not effective 

BRT 

*** 

User brightness 

• 




UP7DN* is not effective 

BSM 

SOO 

After image/Burning safe mode: OFF 

• 




UP7DN* is not effective 

SOI 

After image/Burning safe mode: ON 

• 





C 

CBU 


Clearing backup data of EEPROM 

• 



• 


CHM 


Clearing data of the hour meter 

• 



• 


CHN 

FWD 

Changing tuner preset channel (1 step forward) 


• 




REV 

Changing tuner preset channel (1 step reverse) 


• 




CHR 


Clearing data of the hour meter of MTB side 


• 


• 


CNT 

*** 

User contrast 

• 




UP7DN* is not effective 

CMT 


Clearing data of the maximum temperature 

• 



• 


CPC 


Clearing power-on count data 

• 



• 


CPD 


Clearing power-down histrory 

• 



• 


CPM 


Clearing data of the pulse meter 

• 



• 


CSD 


Clearing shutdown history 

• 



• 


CTM 


Releasing the TRAP SW 


• 




D 

DIZ 

soo 

Dither/L dither OFF & noise OFF 

• 



• 


SOI 

Dither/L dither ON & noise ON 

• 



• 


S02 

Dither/L dither OFF & noise ON 

• 



• 


S03 

Dither/L dither ON & noise OFF 

• 



• 


DRV 

SOO 

Panel drive-power OFF 

• 





SOI 

Panel drive-power ON 

• 





DW* 


To subtract *** to the adjustment value (*** = 000 to 999, designated by a 
function command) 


• 





PDP-5010FD 


146 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


Command 

Name 

Function 

Active 

U-com 

Last 

Memory 

Effective only 
in Factory 
mode 

Remarks 

MDU 

MTB 


F 

FAJ 

Determining the flag of the DIGITAL Assy adjustment in "adjustment is 
completed" 

• 



• 


FAN 

Factory mode OFF 

• 

• 


• 


FAY 

Factory mode ON 

• 

• 




FST 

Set each memory setting of MTB side to the shipment state. 


• 


• 


G 

GHI 

*** 

User white balance : GREEN highlight 

• 




UP*/DN* is not effective 

GLW 

*** 

User white balance : GREEN low light 

• 




UP7DN* is not effective 

1 

INA 

*** 

Switching the terrestrial analog signal (ANTENNA A) 
(***: channel number) 


• 

Main 




***** 

**** 

Switching the terrestrial digital signal (ANTENNA A) 
(***»*»***: channel number) 


• 

Main 





Switching to the ANTENNA A 


• 

Main 



INB 

*** 

Switching the terrestrial analog signal (ANTENNA B) 
(***:channel number) 


• 

Main 





Switching to the ANTENNA B 


• 

Main 



INH 


Switching the HomeGallery (Home Media Gallery for the ELITE model) 


• 




INP 

SOI 

Input switch: INPUT 1 


• 

Main 




S02 

Input switch: INPUT 2 


• 

Main 




S03 

Input switch: INPUT 3 


• 

Main 




S04 

Input switch: INPUT 4 


• 

Main 




S05 

Input switch: INPUT 5 


• 

Main 




S06 

Input switch: INPUT 6 


• 

Main 




S07 

Input switch: INPUT 7 


• 

Main 




S08 

Input switch: INPUT 8 (PC) 


• 

Main 



M 

MIR 

SOO 

Mirror mode: OFF (default) 

• 






SOI 

Mirror mode: Right and left inversion 

• 






S02 

Mirror mode: Top and bottom inversion 

• 






S03 

Mirror mode: Top and bottom and right and left inversion 

• 





MKC 

SOO 

Panel mask indication off 

• 


Mod 




SOI 

H ramp (slant 1) M 

• 


Mod 

• 



S02 

H ramp (slant 4) M 

• 


Mod 

• 



S03 

Slanting ramp M 

• 


Mod 

• 



S04 

30 for aging 

• 


Mod 

• 



S05 

05 for aging 

• 


Mod 

• 



S06 

Erasing afterimage 1 

• 


Mod 

• 



S07 

Erasing afterimage 2 

• 


Mod 

• 



S08 

White (change in luminance level) 

• 


Mod 

• 



S09 

PEAK detection raster 

• 


Mod 

• 



S10 

Address lack check 

• 


Mod 

• 



S11 

Green vertical line scroll 

• 


Mod 

• 



S12 

Green horizontal line scroll 

• 


Mod 

• 



S13 

Vertical ramp vertical scroll (white) 

• 


Mod 

• 



S14 

Vertical ramp vertical scroll (green) 

• 


Mod 

• 



S15 

Horizontal ramp horizontal scroll (white) 

• 


Mod 

• 



S16 

Horizontal ramp horizontal scroll (green) 

• 


Mod 

• 



S17 

Cross hatch + window 

• 


Mod 

• 


MKS 

SOO 

MASK OFF 

• 


Mod 




SOI 

H ramp (slant 1) 

• 


Mod 

• 



S02 

H ramp (slant 4) 

• 


Mod 

• 



PDP-5010FD 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 



1 


2 


3 


4 


Command 

Name 

Function 

Active 

U-com 

Last 

Memory 

Effective only 
in Factory 
mode 

Remarks 

MDU 

MTB 

M 


S03 

V ramp (slant 1) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S04 

Slanting ramp 

• 


Mod 

• 


S05 

Window (Hi= 870, Lo= 102) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S06 

Window (Hi= 1023, Lo= 102) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S07 

Window (Hi= 1023, Lo=000) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S08 

Window (Hi= 1023) 4% 

• 


Mod 

• 


S09 

Window (Hi= 1023) 1.25% 

• 


Mod 

• 


S10 

Window (1/7 LINE) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S11 

STRIPE (MGT/GRN) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S12 

STRIPE (GRN/MGT) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S13 

B & W, checker (1 line) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S14 

B & W, checker (2 lines) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S15 

B & W, checker (4 lines) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S16 

B & W, checker (8 lines) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S17 

COLOR BAR 

• 


Mod 

• 


S18 

Slanting lines 

• 


Mod 

• 


S19 

Red & black, checker (1 line) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S20 

Red & black, checker (2 lines) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S21 

Red & black, checker (4 lines) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S22 

Red & black, checker (8 lines) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S23 

Erasing afterimage (RGB: zigzag, V: reverse) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S24 

SUS 2000 pulses (black raster) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S25 

1 for perfect linear 

• 


Mod 

• 


S26 

2 for perfect linear 

• 


Mod 

• 


S27 

3 for perfect linear 

• 


Mod 

• 


S28 

4 for perfect linear 

• 


Mod 

• 


S29 

RGB checker 1 

• 


Mod 

• 


S30 

RGB checker 2 

• 


Mod 

• 


S31 

Window RED (RED=1023) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S32 

Window GREEN (GREEN=1023) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S33 

Window BLUE (BLUE=1023) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S34 

Even line horizontal stripes 

• 


Mod 

• 


S35 

Odd line horizontal stripes 

• 


Mod 

• 


S36 

Afterimage check 1 

• 


Mod 

• 


S37 

Afterimage check 2 

• 


Mod 

• 


S38 

Afterimage check 3 

• 


Mod 

• 


S39 

Afterimage check 4 

• 


Mod 

• 


S40 

Red single-color slanting ramp 

• 


Mod 

• 


S41 

GREEN single-color slanting ramp 

• 


Mod 

• 


S42 

BLUE single-color slanting ramp 

• 


Mod 

• 


S43 

For panel light check 1 

• 


Mod 

• 


S44 

For panel light check 2 

• 


Mod 

• 


S45 

5 for perfect linear 

• 


Mod 

• 


S46 

6 for perfect linear 

• 


Mod 

• 


S47 

7 for perfect linear 

• 


Mod 

• 


S48 

8 for perfect linear 

• 


Mod 

• 


S49 

Mask for ABL adjustment 

• 


Mod 

• 


S51 

Raster - White 

• 


Mod 

• 


S52 

Raster - Red 

• 


Mod 

• 


S53 

Raster - Green 

• 


Mod 

• 



148 


PDP-501 OFD 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


Command 

Name 

Function 

Active 

U-com 

Last 

Memory 

Effective only 
in Factory 
mode 

Remarks 

MDU 

MTB 


MKS 

S54 

Raster - Blue 

• 


Mod 

• 



S55 

Raster - Black 

• 


Mod 

• 



S56 

Raster - Cyan 

• 


Mod 

• 



S57 

Raster - Magenta 

• 


Mod 

• 



S58 

Raster - Yellow 

• 


Mod 

• 



S59 

Raster - Pink 

• 


Mod 

• 



S60 

Raster - Cyan 291 

• 


Mod 

• 



S61 

Raster - Yellow egg color 

• 


Mod 

• 



S62 

Raster - Light blue 

• 


Mod 

• 



S63 

Raster - Beige 

• 


Mod 

• 



S64 

Raster - Gray 291 

• 


Mod 

• 



S65 

Raster - Red 1 023+ 

• 


Mod 

• 



S66 

Raster - Green 1023+ 

• 


Mod 

• 



S67 

Raster - Blue 1023+ 

• 


Mod 

• 



S68 

Raster - Red 626 

• 


Mod 

• 



S69 

Raster - Green 626 

• 


Mod 

• 



S70 

Raster - Blue 626 

• 


Mod 

• 



S71 

Raster - Gray 2SF 

• 


Mod 

• 



S72 

Raster - Cyan 3SF 

• 


Mod 

• 



S73 

Raster - Magenta 3SF 

• 


Mod 

• 



S74 

Raster - Yellow 3SF 

• 


Mod 

• 



S75 

Raster - Gray 307 

• 


Mod 

• 


MST 

SOO 

Display one screen 


• 





SOI 

PsideP (Main size: normal) 


• 





S02 

PinP (Right down) 


• 





S03 

PinP (Right up) 


• 





S04 

PinP (Left up) 


• 





S05 

PinP (Left down) 


• 





S08 

SWAP (Exchanging sub-screen) 


• 




N 

NGP 

SOO 

Negative positive inversion: OFF (default) 

• 






SOI 

Negative positive inversion: ON 

• 





O 

OSD 

SOO 

Turning OSD setting to off 


• 

Main 




SOI 

Turning OSD setting to on 


• 

Main 



P 

PAV 

SOO 

Panel drive mode (FACTORY) 

• 






SOI 

Panel drive mode (STANDARD) 

• 






S02 

Panel drive mode (DYNAMIC) 

• 






S03 

Panel drive mode (MOVIE) 

• 






S04 

Panel drive mode (GAME) 

• 






S05 

Panel drive mode (SPORTS) 

• 






S06 

Panel drive mode (PURE) 

• 






S07 

Panel drive mode (USER) 

• 






S08 

Panel drive mode (ISF-DAY) 

• 






S09 

Panel drive mode (ISF-NIGHT) 

• 






S10 

Panel drive mode (OPTIMUM 

• 






F 


PDP-501 OFD 


149 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


Command 

Name 

Function 

Active 

U-com 

Last 

Memory 

Effective only 
in Factory 
mode 

Remarks 

MDU 

MTB 

P 

PBH 

*** 

Panel white balance adjustment - Blue highlight 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

PBL 

*** 

Panel white balance adjustment - Blue low light 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

PDM 

soo 

Passing PD signals to the POWER SUPPLY Unit => Power-down 

• 






SOI 

Not passing PD signals to the POWER SUPPLY Unit => No power-down 

• 





PES 

soo 

For general-purpose commonness: Standard 

• 






SOI 

For general-purpose commonness: Energy saving 1 

• 






S02 

For general-purpose commonness: Energy saving 2 

• 






S10 

For general-purpose Japan standard: Standard 

• 






S11 

For general-purpose Japan standard: Standard 

• 






S12 

For general-purpose Japan standard: Standard 

• 





PFL 

SOO 

Peripheral luminance correction: OFF 

• 



• 



SOI 

Peripheral luminance correction: ON fixed 

• 



• 



S02 

Peripheral luminance correction: APL interlocked ON (default) 

• 



• 


PFM 

SOO 

It does not return the hierarchy character of the panel factory 

• 



• 



SOI 

It returns the hierarchy character of the panel factory 

• 



• 


PFN 


Factory mode: OFF 

• 



During PFY 


PFS 


Setup at shipment 

• 



• 


PFY 


Factory mode: ON 

• 





PGB 

soo 

Blue-independent gamma setting: Straight 

• 






SOI 

Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1 .6 

• 






S02 

Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1 .7 

• 






S03 

Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1 .8 

• 






S04 

Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1 .9 

• 






S05 

Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.0 

• 






S06 

Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.1 

• 






S07 

Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.2 (default) 

• 






S08 

Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.3 

• 






S09 

Blue-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.4 

• 






S10-31 

Blue-independent gamma setting: Customize 

• 





PGG 

SOO 

Green-independent gamma setting: Straight 

• 






SOI 

Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.6 

• 






S02 

Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.7 

• 






S03 

Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.8 

• 






S04 

Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.9 

• 






S05 

Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.0 

• 






S06 

Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.1 

• 






S07 

Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.2 (default) 

• 






S08 

Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.3 

• 






S09 

Green-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.4 

• 






S10-31 

Green-independent gamma setting: Customize 

• 





PGH 

*** 

Panel white balance adjustment - Green highlight 

• 


Mod 

• 


PGL 

*** 

Panel white balance adjustment - Green low light 

• 


Mod 

• 



F 


PDP-501 OFD 


150 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


Command 

Name 

Function 

Active 

U-com 

Last 

Memory 

Effective only 
in Factory 
mode 

Remarks 

MDU 

MTB 


P 

PGR 

SOO 

Red-independent gamma setting: Straight 

• 






SOI 

Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.6 

• 






S02 

Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.7 

• 






S03 

Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.8 

• 






S04 

Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 1.9 

• 






S05 

Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.0 

• 






S06 

Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.1 

• 






S07 

Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.2 (default) 

• 






S08 

Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.3 

• 






S09 

Red-independent gamma setting: Fixed on 2.4 

• 






SI 0-31 

Red-independent gamma setting: Customize 

• 





PKD 

SOO 

Peak luminance detection: OFF 

• 



• 



SOI 

Peak luminance detection: ON 

• 



• 


PKL 

SOO 

Panel brightness setting No brightness limitation : 100 % (default) 

• 






SOI 

Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 1 : 87 % 

• 






S02 

Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 2 : 73 % 

• 






S03 

Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 3 : 60 % 

• 






S04 

Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 4 : 52 % 

• 






S05 

Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 5 : 40 % 

• 






S06 

Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 6 : 27 % 

• 






S07 

Panel brightness setting Brightness limitation 7:13% 

• 





PMT 

SOO 

Canceling panel muting 

• 






SOI 

Panel muting 

• 





POF 


Power OFF 

• 

• 

Main 



PON 


Power ON 

• 

• 

Main 



PPT 

SOO 

Panel protection: OFF 

• 



• 



SOI 

Panel protection: ON 

• 



• 


PRH 

*** 

Panel white balance adjustment - Red highlight 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP*/DN* is not effective 

PRL 

*** 

Panel white balance adjustment - Red low light 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP*/DN* is not effective 

PUC 

SOO 

Pure cinema: off 


• 

Main 

• 



SOI 

Pure cinema: Standard 


• 

Main 

• 



S02 

Pure cinema: Advance 


• 

Main 

• 



S03 

Pure cinema: Smooth 


• 

Main 

• 


Q 

QAJ 


Acquiring various adjustment values 

• 





QMT 


Acquiring temperature of MTB side and Fan speed 


• 




QNG 


Acquiring shutdown information of MTB side 


• 




QPD 


Acquiring logs of power-down points 

• 





QPM 


Acquiring data of the pulse meter 

• 





QPW 


Acquiring panel white balance adjustment values 

• 





QS1 


Acquiring unit data, such as the software version common to all models, 
regardless of destination 

• 

• 




QS2 


Acquiring data on the status of the unit, such as temperature 

• 





QS3 


Each information output for panel 

• 





QSE 


Acquiring unit data, such as the software version common to all models, 
regardless of destination 


• 




QSD 


Acquiring data on shutdown 

• 





QSI 


Acquiring data related with signals 

• 





QSP 


Acquiring the software sub-version of the microcomputer at panel side 

• 






PDP-501 OFD 


151 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


Command 

Name 

Function 

Active 

U-com 

Last 

Memory 

Effective only 
in Factory 
mode 

Remarks 

MDU 

MTB 

R 

R1K 

*** 

First reset (wedge width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

R2K 

*** 

Second reset (wedge width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

RBL 

soo 

BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LvO (no correction) 

• 


Mod 

• 



SOI 

BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV1 

• 


Mod 

• 



S02 

BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV2 

• 


Mod 

• 



S03 

BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV3 

• 


Mod 

• 



S04 

BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV4 

• 


Mod 

• 



S05 

BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV5 

• 


Mod 

• 



S06 

BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV6 

• 


Mod 

• 



S07 

BLUE setting for panel degradation correction: LV7 

• 


Mod 

• 


RGL 

SOO 

GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LvO (no correction) 

• 


Mod 

• 



SOI 

GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV1 

• 


Mod 

• 



S02 

GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV2 

• 


Mod 

• 



S03 

GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV3 

• 


Mod 

• 



S04 

GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV4 

• 


Mod 

• 



S05 

GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV5 

• 


Mod 

• 



S06 

GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV6 

• 


Mod 

• 



S07 

GREEN setting for panel degradation correction: LV7 

• 


Mod 

• 


RHI 

*** 

User white balance - Red highlight 

• 




UP7DN* is not effective 

RLS 

SOO 

Room light sensor operation : OFF 

• 






SOI 

Room light sensor operation : 1 

• 






S02 

Room light sensor operation : 2 

• 






S03 

Room light sensor operation : 3 

• 






S04 

Room light sensor operation : 4 

• 






S05 

Room light sensor operation : 5 

• 





RLW 

*** 

User white balance - Red low light 

• 




UP7DN* is not effective 

RRL 

SOO 

RED setting for panel degradation correction: LvO (no correction) 

• 


Mod 

• 



SOI 

RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV1 

• 


Mod 

• 



S02 

RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV2 

• 


Mod 

• 



S03 

RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV3 

• 


Mod 

• 



S04 

RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV4 

• 


Mod 

• 



S05 

RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV5 

• 


Mod 

• 



S06 

RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV6 

• 


Mod 

• 



S07 

RED setting for panel degradation correction: LV7 

• 


Mod 

• 


S 

SDM 

SOO 

Shutdown enabled 

• 



• 



SOI 

Shutdown prohibited 

• 



• 


SFR 

SOI 

Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 1 

• 


Mod 

• 



S02 

Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 2 

• 


Mod 

• 



S03 

Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 3 

• 


Mod 

• 



S04 

Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 4 

• 


Mod 

• 



S05 

Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 5 

• 


Mod 

• 



S06 

Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 6 

• 


Mod 

• 



S07 

Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 7 

• 


Mod 

• 



S08 

Measures against AM radio noise - SUS FREQUENCY MODE 8 

• 


Mod 

• 



F 


PDP-501 OFD 


152 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


Command 

Name 

Function 

Active 

U-com 

Last 

Memory 

Effective only 
in Factory 
mode 

Remarks 

MDU 

MTB 

S 

SKM 

SOO 

STREAKING correction mode OFF 

• 


Mod 

• 


SOI 

STREAKING correction mode 1 

• 


Mod 

• 


S02 

STREAKING correction mode 2 

• 


Mod 

• 


S03 

STREAKING correction mode 3 

• 


Mod 

• 


S04 

STREAKING correction mode 4 

• 


Mod 

• 


S05 

STREAKING correction mode 5 

• 


Mod 

• 


S06 

STREAKING correction mode 6 

• 


Mod 

• 


S07 

STREAKING correction mode 7 

• 


Mod 

• 


S08 

STREAKING correction mode 8 

• 


Mod 

• 


SMC 

SOI 

Smooth clear drive OFF 

• 



• 


S02 

Smooth clear drive ON (default) 

• 



• 


SML 

*** 

Adjustment of the side mask level 


• 

Main 

• 


SMM 

SOO 

Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: All screen detection (default) 

• 



• 


SOI 

Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: 4:3 detection 

• 





S02 

Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: 14:9 detection 

• 





S03 

Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: D-BY-D detection VGA 

• 





S04 

Setting of the effective area during streaking correction: D-BY-D detection SVGA 

• 





SNO 

*** 

Setting of the serial No. 0 (panel) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP*/DN* is not effective 

SN1 

*** 

Setting of the serial No. 1 (panel) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP*/DN* is not effective 

SN2 

*** 

Setting of the serial No. 2 (panel) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP*/DN* is not effective 

SN3 

*** 

Setting of the serial No. 3 (panel) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP*/DN* is not effective 

SN4 

*** 

Setting of the serial No. 4 (panel) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP*/DN* is not effective 

SQM 

SOI 

Panel sequence mode: VIDEO sequence 

• 





S02 

Panel sequence mode: PC sequence 

• 





S03 

Panel sequence mode: FILM sequence 

• 





SSM 

SOI 

SSCG OFF 

• 



• 

It is necessary to wait for 
one minute after drive OFF 

S02 

SSCG ON 

• 



• 

SZM 

SOO 

Setting the screen size to Dot by Dot 


• 

Main 



SOI 

Setting the screen size to 4 :3 


• 

Main 



S02 

Setting the screen size to FULL 


• 

Main 



S03 

Setting the screen size to ZOOM 


• 

Main 



S04 

Setting the screen size to CINEMA 


• 

Main 



S05 

Setting the screen size to WIDE 


• 

Main 



T 








THS 

SOO 

Theater port interlock operation OFF 

• 





SOI 

Theater port interlock operation ON 

• 





U 








UAJ 


Determining the flag for the DIGITAL Assy adjustment in "not adjusted" 

• 


Mod 

• 


UP* 


To add *** to the adjustment value (*** = 000 to 999, designated by a 
function command) 


• 





F 


PDP-501 OFD 


153 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


Command 

Name 

Function 

Active 

U-com 

Last 

Memory 

Effective only 
in Factory 
mode 

Remarks 

MDU 

MTB 

V 

VFQ 

SOI 

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-48 Hz 

• 


Mod 

• 


S02 

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-50 Hz 

• 


Mod 

• 


S03 

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-60 Hz 

• 


Mod 

• 


S05 

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-72 Hz 

• 


Mod 

• 


S06 

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-75 Hz 

• 


Mod 

• 


S13 

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to PC-60 Hz 

• 


Mod 

• 


S22 

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-50 Hz (nonstandard) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S23 

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-60 Hz (nonstandard) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S25 

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-72 Hz (nonstandard) 

• 


Mod 

• 


S26 

Setting the frequency in Mask mode to VD-75 Hz (nonstandard) 

• 


Mod 

• 


VOF 

*** 

Adjustment of the reference value of Vysnofs voltage Vysnofs ADJUSTMENT 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

VOL 

UP*, 

DW*, 

*** 

To adjust the volume (to be used in combination with UP*/DW») 


• 




VRP 

*** 

Adjustment of the reference value of Vyprst voltage Vyprst ADJUSTMENT 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

VSU 

*** 

Adjustment of the reference value of Vsus voltage Vsus ADJUSTMENT 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

VX1 

*** 

Adjustment of the reference value of Vxpofsl voltage Vxpofsl ADJUSTMENT 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

VX2 

*** 

Adjustment of the reference value of Vxpofs2 voltage Vxpofs2 ADJUSTMENT 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

VY1 

*** 

Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofsl , 2 voltage Vyknofsl ,2 ADJUSTMENT 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

VY3 

*** 

Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofs3 voltage Vyknofs3 ADJUSTMENT 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

VY4 

*** 

Adjustment of the reference value of Vyknofs4 voltage Vyknofs4 ADJUSTMENT 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

W 

WBI 

soo 

Panel WB standard output mode: OFF 

• 



• 


SOI 

Panel WB standard output mode: ON 

• 



• 


X 

XI B 

*** 

3SF and later-first XSUS (resonance up width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

X3B 

*** 

2SF-third XSUS (resonance up width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

XSB 

*** 

2SF-repeat XSUS (resonance up width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

Y 

Y1K 

*** 

1 SF-YSUS-Tail (wedge width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

Y1Z 

*** 

1 SF-YSUS-Tail (resonance down width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

Y2B 

*** 

2SF-second YSUS (resonance up width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

Y2K 

*** 

2SF-YSUS-Tail (wedge width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

Y2Z 

*** 

2SF-YSUS-Tail (resonance down width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

YNK 

*** 

3SF and later (SSF 2 pulses)-YSUS Tail (wedge width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

YNZ 

*** 

3SF and later (SSF 2 pulses)-YSUS Tail (resonance down width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

YTK 

*** 

3SF and later-YSUS Tail (wedge width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

YTZ 

*** 

3SF and later-YSUS Tail (resonance down width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

YSB 

*** 

2SF-repeat YSUS (resonance up width) 

• 


Mod 

• 

UP7DN* is not effective 

Z 

ZME 


Initializing the video EEPROM data 


• 


• 


ZPR 


Initializing the setting data to which no adjustment command is provided 
PANEL EEPROM REFLESH 

• 


Mod 

• 



PDP-501 OFD 


154 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


9.3 DETAILS OF EACH COMMANDS 

9.3.1 QS1 (PANEL STATUS) 


Model information and version information are returned. 


A 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QS1] 

Every Time 

Output of status 

Return data: 3 (ECO) + 84 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 89 Byte 


15: MTB Generation 

6 

G6 

7 

G7 

8 

G8 

9 

G9 

0 

G10 


Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output Example 

ECO 

3 byte 

QS1 (Fixed) 

1 

Resolution/Size 

1 byte 

F 

2 

Panel Generation 

1 byte 

8 

3 

Destination 

1 byte 

* 

4 

Grade 

1 byte 

* 

5 

Panel Product Form 

1 byte 

B 

6 

Boot version of Module microcomputer 

3 byte 

05F 

7 

Program version of Module microcomputer 

8 byte 

-02F 

8 

Boot version of SQJ-SI 

3 byte 

04 F 

9 

Program version of SQ_LSI 

8 byte 

-01 Y 

10 

Panel information 

8 byte 

G8_50F 

11 

Reserved (panel section) 

8 byte 

******** 

14 

, (comma) 

1 byte 

, 

15 

MTB generation 

1 byte 

8 

16 

MTB destination 

1 byte 

A 

17 

MTB grade 

1 byte 

H 

18 

MTB product form 

1 byte 

B 

19 

Program version of IF microcomputer 

8 byte 

010AE 

20 

Boot version of IF microcomputer 

4 byte 

01 A 

21 

Program version of Main microcomputer 

8 byte 

-01 A 

22 

Boot version of Main microcomputer 

4 byte 

01 A 

23 

Program version of ASIC 

8 byte 

-01 A 

24 

Boot version of ASIC 

4 byte 

01 A 

25 

CS (Check Sum) 

2 byte 

FF 


16: MTB Destination 

A 

North America 

C 

China 

E 

Europe 

G 

General 

J 

Japan 

U 

Australia 


17: MTB Grade 

H 

Elite/XDA/Step-upD 

T 

Step-upA/XG/XC/Regular (US) 

B 

Not used 

S 

RegularD 

R 

RegularA 


18: MTB Product Form 

S 

System model 

B 

One body model 


3: Destination 

* 

Commonness 

A 

US (Reserved) 

E 

EU (Reserved) 

J 

Japan (Reserved) 


10: Panel Information 

1 to 3rd byte 

G8_ 

Generation information G8 + _(under bar) fixed 

4 to 5th byte 

42 

42 inch 

50 

50 inch 

60 

60 inch 

* 

PSIZE information and SQ_LSI version 
mismatching (version mismatching at SD) 

6th byte 

F 

FFID model 

X 

XGA model 

* 

Model information and SCLLSI version 
mismatching (version mismatching at SD) 

7th byte 

_ 

Under bar 

8th byte 

6 

2nd PLANT (XGA 50 inch only) 

4 

1st PLANT (XGA 50 inch only) 

* 

PLANT information and SQ_LSI version 
mismatching (version mismatching at SD) 

1 

Others 


1: Resolution/Size 

3 

1024*768/42 

4 

1024*768/43 

5 

1280*768/50 

6 

1365*768/50 

7 

1365*768/60 

E 

1920*1080/42 

F 

1920*1080/50 

G 

1920*1080/60 


4: Grade 

* 

Commonness 

z 

Evaluation 


5: Panel Product Form 

s 

System model 

B 

All-in-one design TV 

M 

Monitor 

D 

Standard module 

E 

Simple module 


2: Panel Generation 

6 

G6 

7 

G7 

8 

G8 

9 

G9 

0 

G10 


PDP-501 OFD 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


9.3.2 QS2 (PANEL OPERATION DATA) 


A 

The command QS2 is for acquiring data on the panel's operational information. 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QS2] 

All operations 

To acquire data on operations of the panel 

Return data: 3 (ECO) + 34 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 39 Byte 


Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output Example 

ECO 

3 byte 

QS2 (fixed) 

1 

Power supply status 

1 byte 

0 

2 

Adjustment flag of the main unit 

1 byte 

0 

3 

Adjustment-data backup flag 

1 byte 

0 

4 

"1st PD" data 

1 byte 

0 

5 

"2nd PD" data 

1 byte 

0 

6 

Reserved 

3 byte 

** 

7 

Temperature data (TEMP 1) 

3 byte 

063 

8 

SD main data 

1 byte 

0 

9 

SD sub data 

1 byte 

0 

10 

Operation status induced by SD 

1 byte 

0 

11 

Reserved 

3 byte 

0 

12 

HOUR METER 

8 byte 

00000437 

13 

MASK indication 

1 byte 

0 

14 

Still picture detection 

1 byte 

7C 

15 

SCAN protection detection 

1 byte 


16 

Panel crack detection 

1 byte 


17 

Address emergency detection 

1 byte 


18 

Reserved 

4 byte 


19 

CS 

2 byte 



8: SD main data 

0 

No SD 

1 

SQ„LSI communication error 

2 

MDU-IIC communication error 

3 

Abnormally in RST2 

4 

TEMP 


9-1 : SD-Sub (SQ_LSI) 

0 

No SD-Sub data 

1 

Communication error 

2 

Drive stop 

3 

BUSY 

4 

Version mismatching (H/S) 

5 

Version mismatching (M/S) 


9-2: SD-Sub (MDU-IIC) 

0 

No SD-Sub data 

1 

EEPROM 

2 

BACKUP 

3 

DAC1 

4 

DAC2 


9-3: SD-Sub (TEMP) 

0 

No SD-Sub data 

1 

TEMPI high temperature 

2 

TEMPI low temperature 


4, 5: PD data 

0 

No PD data 

1 

Not used 

2 

POWER 

3 

SCAN 

4 

SCN-5V 

5 

Y-DRV 

6 

Y-DCDC 

7 

Y-SUS 

8 

ADRS 

9 

X-DRV 

A 

X-DCDC 

B 

X-SUS 

C 

DIG-DCDC 

D 

Not used 

E 

Not used 

F 

UNKNOWN 


1 : Power supply status 

P 

During power ON 

0 

Entering Passive 
mode failed during 
standby 

1 

Entering Passive 
mode succeeded 
during standby 


10: Operation status 
induced by SD 

0 

Normal 

i 

Relay-off completed 

2 

During warning 
indication 


2: Adjustment flag of 
the main unit 

0 

Adjustment completed 

1 

Adjustment not 
completed 


13: MASK indication 

0 

MASK-OFF 

i 

MASK-ON 


14 to 17: Detection of Each Protection function 

0 

Normal operation 

1 

At detection of protection operation 


3: Adjustment-data 
backup flag 

0 

With backup data 

1 

No backup data 


PDP-5010FD 


156 


i 


2 


3 


4 




5 


6 


7 


8 


9.3.3 QS3 (OTHER DATA ON THE PANEL) 


The command QS3 is for acquiring data on operational information of the panel. 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QS3] 

All operations 

To acquire data on operations of the panel 

Return data: 3 (ECO) + 58 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 63 Byte 


Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output Example 

ECO 

3 byte 

QS3 

1 

SERIAL 

1 5 byte 


2 

HOUR METER 

8 byte 

00000000 

3 

BACKUP HR METER 

8 byte 

00000000 

4 

PON COUNTER 

8 byte 

00000000 

5 

TEMPI acquisition (Temperature value) 

5 byte 

+25.0 (*1) 

6 

TEMPO acquisition (Temperature value) 

5 byte 

+25.0 (*1) 

7 

MaxTEMP acquisition (Temperature value) 

5 byte 

+75.0 (*1) 

8 

Reserved 

4 byte 

**** 

9 

CS 

2 byte 

FB 


Note 

(*1) : Centigrade scale 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


157 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


9.3.4 QAJ (PANEL ADJUSTMENT DATA) 


A 

The command QAJ is for acquiring the panel's factory-preset data. 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QAJ] 

All operations 

To acquire data on the setting value of drive voltage 

Return data: 3 (ECO) + 84 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 89 Byte 


B 


C 


0 


Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output Example 

ECO 

3 byte 

QAJ 

1 

V-SUS adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

2 

Vysnofs adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

3 

Vyprst adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

4 

Vxpofsl adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

5 

Vxpofs2 adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

6 

Vyknofsl ,2 adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

7 

Vyknofs3 adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

8 

Vyknofs4 adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

9 

R1 K adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

10 

R2K adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

11 

Y1K adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

12 

Y1Z adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

13 

XI B adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

14 

Y2B adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

15 

X3B adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

16 

YSB adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

17 

XSB adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

18 

YTK adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

19 

YTZ adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

20 

Y2K adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

21 

Y2Z adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

22 

YNK adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

23 

YNZ adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

24 

R-REVISE setting value 

1 byte 

0 

25 

G-REVISE setting value 

1 byte 

0 

26 

B-REVISE setting value 

1 byte 

0 

27 

ADDRESS 1 , 2 setting value 

2 byte 

01 

28 

ADDRESS 3, 4 setting value 

2 byte 

13 

29 

ADDRESS 5, 6 setting value 

2 byte 

32 

30 

ADDRESS 7, 8 setting value 

2 byte 

30 

31 

Streaking correction 

1 byte 

1 

32 

AM radio countermeasure 

1 byte 

1 

33 

Reserved 

2 byte 

** 

34 

CS 

2 byte 

B7 


31: Streaking correction 

0 

OFF 

n 

n: 1 to 8 (Mode n) 


32: AM radio countermeasure 

n n: 1 to 8 (SUS frequency n) 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


158 


i 


2 


3 


4 




5 


6 


7 


8 


9.3.5 QPW (VIDEO ADJUSTMENT DATA OF THE PANEL) 


The command QPW is for acquiring the factory-preset data about the video of the panel. 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QPW] 

All operations 

To acquire data on the video setting value 

Return data: 3 (ECO) + 40 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 45 Byte 


Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output 

Example 

ECO 

3 byte 

QPW (fixed) 

1 

Drive sequence 

3 byte 

60V 

2 

Standard/nonstandard 

1 byte 

S 

3 

Type of ABL/WB tables 

2 byte 

T1 

4 

ABL adjustment value 

3 byte 

128 

5 

R-HIGH adjustment value 

3 byte 

256 

6 

G-HIGH adjustment value 

3 byte 

256 

7 

B-HIGH adjustment value 

3 byte 

256 

8 

R-LOW adjustment value 

3 byte 

512 

9 

G-LOW adjustment value 

3 byte 

512 

10 

B-LOW adjustment value 

3 byte 

512 

11 

R gamma setting 

2 byte 

07 

12 

G gamma setting 

2 byte 

07 

13 

B gamma setting 

2 byte 

07 

14 

Streaking correction 

1 byte 

0 

15 

Center luminance correction 

1 byte 

1 

16 

Reserved 

1 byte 

* 

17 

WB interlocked with APL 

1 byte 

0 

18 

Transition of protective operations 

1 byte 

0 

19 

Reserved 

2 byte 

** 

20 

CS 

2 byte 

39 


1: Drive sequence 

48V 

Video 48 Hz 

50V 

Video 50 Hz 

60V 

Video 60 Hz 

72V 

Video 72 Hz 

75V 

Video 75 Hz 

60P 

PC 60 Hz 

70P 

PC 70 Hz 


2: Standard/ 
nonstandard 

s 

Standard 

N 

Nonstandard 


14: Streking 
correction 

0 

OFF 

1 

ON 


3: Type of ABL/WB tables 

n n: 1 to 4 


11,12, 13: RGB Gamma setting 

n 00 to 31 


15: Center luminance 
correction 

0 

OFF 

1 

ON 

2 

ON (interlocked with APL) 


17: WB interlocked with APL 

0 

OFF 

1 

ON 

2 

WB interlocked ON/y OFF 

3 

WB interlocked OFF/y ON 


18: Transition of brightness by 
protective operations 

0 

Upper limit state for brightness 

1 

Brightness being reduced 

2 

Lower limit state for brightness 

3 

Brightness being increased 


A 


B 


D 


9.3.6 QPM (PULSE METER VALUE) 


The command QPM is for acquiring the accumulated number of pulses of the panel. 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QPM] 

All operations 

To acquire data on the accumulated number of pulses 

Return data: 3 (ECO) + 40 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 45 Byte 


Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output Example 

ECO 

3 byte 

QPM (fixed) 

1 

Pulse meter B 1 

8 byte 

00000000 

2 

Pulse meter B 2 

8 byte 

00000000 

3 

Pulse meter B 3 

8 byte 

00000000 

4 

Pulse meter B 4 

8 byte 

00000000 

5 

Pulse meter B 5 

8 byte 

00000000 

6 

CS 

2 byte 

6E 


PDP-501 OFD 


159 


5 


6 


7 


8 





1 


2 


3 


4 


9.3.7 QPD (PD LOGS) 


The command QPD is for acquiring data from the 8 latest power-down (PD) logs. 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QPD] 

All operations 

To acquire data on the power-down logs 

Return data: 3 (ECO) + 80 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 85 Byte 


Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output Example 

ECO 

3 byte 

QPD (fixed) 

1 

Latest "1st PD" data 

1 byte 

A 

2 

Latest "2nd PD" data 

1 byte 

2 

3 

Data from the hour meter for the latest PD 

8 byte 

00010020 

4 

Second latest "1st PD" data 

1 byte 

E 

5 

Second latest "2nd PD" data 

1 byte 

9 

6 

Data from the hour meter for the second latest PD 

8 byte 

00008523 

7 

Third latest "1st PD" data 

1 byte 

4 

8 

Third latest "2nd PD" data 

1 byte 

3 

9 

Data from the hour meter for the third latest PD 

8 byte 

00004335 

10 

Fourth latest "1st PD" data 

1 byte 

2 

11 

Fourth latest "2nd PD" data 

1 byte 

0 

12 

Data from the hour meter for the fourth latest PD 

8 byte 

00000945 

13 

Fifth latest "1st PD" data 

1 byte 

4 

14 

Fifth latest "2nd PD" data 

1 byte 

0 

15 

Data from the hour meter for the fifth latest PD 

8 byte 

00000715 

16 

Sixth latest “1st PD" data 

1 byte 

A 

17 

Sixth latest “2nd PD" data 

1 byte 

2 

18 

Data from the hour meter for the sixth latest PD 

8 byte 

00000552 

19 

Seventh latest "1st PD" data 

1 byte 

A 

20 

Seventh latest "2nd PD" data 

1 byte 

0 

21 

Data from the hour meter for the seventh latest PD 

8 byte 

00000213 

22 

Eighth latest "1st PD" data 

1 byte 

D 

23 

Eighth latest "2nd PD" data 

1 byte 

0 

24 

Data from the hour meter for the eighth latest PD 

8 byte 

00000123 

25 

CS 

2 byte 

27 


1, 2, 4, 5: PD data 

0 

No PD 

1 

Not used 

2 

P-POWER 

3 

SCAN 

4 

SCN-5V 

5 

Y-DRIVE 

6 

Y-DCDC 

7 

Y-SUS 

8 

Address 

9 

X-DRIVE 

A 

X-DCDC 

B 

X-SUS 

C 

DIGITAL-DC/DC 

D 

Not used 

E 

Not used 

F 

UNKNOWN 


PDP-5010FD 


160 


i 


2 


3 


4 




5 


6 


7 


8 


9.3.8 QSD (SD LOGS) 


The command QSD is for acquiring the data from the 8 latest shutdown (SD) logs. 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QSD] 

All operations 

To acquire data on the shutdown logs 

Return data: 3 (ECO) + 80 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 85 Byte 


• SD data (Main) 

0 

No SD (Main) 

1 

SQ_LSI communication error 

2 

MDU-IIC communication error 

3 

Abnormally in RST2 

4 

TEMP 


Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output Example 

ECO 

3 byte 

QSD (fixed) 

1 

Latest SD data 

1 byte 

1 

2 

Latest SD subcategory data 

1 byte 

0 

3 

Data from the hour meter for the latest SD 

8 byte 

00752013 

4 

Second latest SD data 

1 byte 

5 

5 

Second latest SD subcategory data 

1 byte 

0 

6 

Data from the hour meter for the second latest SD 

8 byte 

00456378 

7 

Third latest SD data 

1 byte 

2 

8 

Third latest SD subcategory data 

1 byte 

3 

9 

Data from the hour meter for the third latest SD 

8 byte 

00347845 

10 

Fourth latest SD data 

1 byte 

2 

11 

Fourth latest SD subcategory data 

1 byte 

4 

12 

Data from the hour meter for the fourth latest SD 

8 byte 

00175635 

13 

Fifth latest SD data 

1 byte 

1 

14 

Fifth latest SD subcategory data 

1 byte 

0 

15 

Data from the hour meter for the fifth latest SD 

8 byte 

00083450 

16 

Sixth latest SD data 

1 byte 

2 

17 

Sixth latest SD subcategory data 

1 byte 

2 

18 

Data from the hour meter for the sixth latest SD 

8 byte 

00045662 

19 

Seventh latest SD data 

1 byte 

0 

20 

Seventh latest SD subcategory data 

1 byte 

0 

21 

Data from the hour meter for the seventh latest SD 

8 byte 

00000000 

22 

Eighth latest SD data 

1 byte 

0 

23 

Eighth latest SD subcategory data 

1 byte 

0 

24 

Data from the hour meter for the eighth latest SD 

8 byte 

00000000 

25 

CS 

2 Byte 

7D 


• SD subcategory (SQ_LSI) 

0 

No SD-Sub data 

1 

Communication error 

2 

Drive stop 

3 

BUSY 

4 

Version mismatching (H/S) 

5 

Version mismatching (M/S) 


• SD subcategory (Main: MDU-IIC) 

0 

No SD-Sub data 

1 

Main-EEPROM 

2 

Backup-EEPROM 

3 

DAC1 

4 

DAC2 


• SD subcategory (Main: TEMP) 

0 

No SD-Sub data 

1 

TEMPI (high temperature) 

2 

TEMPI (low temperature) 


PDP-501 OFD 


161 


5 


6 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


9.3.9 QSE (DESTINATION PECULIAR INFORMATION) 


Induce it peculiar, individual information is acquired. 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QSE] 

Every time 

Output of status 



Order 

Part 

Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output 

Example 

0 

- 

Received Command name 

3 byte 

QSE 

1 


DTV Hardware Version 

8 byte 

07080200 

2 


DTV Hardware Serial 

8 byte 

16777215 

3 


DTV RUNTIME Version 

8 byte 

= 00K.22p 

4 


CFE Version 

8 byte 

07.00d 

5 


KERNEL Version 

8 byte 

2.4.2527 

6 


ROOTS Version 

8 byte 

04.13d 

7 


FLAGS Information 1 

1 byte 

Y 

8 


FLAGS Information 2 

1 byte 

* 

9 


FLAGS Information 3 

1 byte 

N 

10 


FLAGS Information 4 

1 byte 

Y 

11 


FLAGS Information 5 

1 byte 

N 

12 


FLAGS Information 6 

1 byte 

N 

13 


HMG/HG Model Version 

1 0 byte 

1.0.126 

14 


User Password 

4 byte 

1234 

15 

- 

Check Sum 

2 byte 

13 


9.3.10 QMT (TEMPERATURE / FAN ROTATION / ROOM LIGHT SENSOR) 


Temperature information / FAN rotation state / Room light sensor information on the MTB side is returned. 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QMT] 

Every time 

Output of status 

A/D value of MTB-side's temperature/FAN rotating status 


Order 

Part 

Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output Example 

0 

- 

Received Command name 

3 byte 

QMT 

1 

MTB 

A/D value of MTB-side Temperature 

3 byte 

267 

2 

MTB-side FAN rotating speed (0: STOP, 1: LOW, 2: HIGH) 

1 byte 

1 

3 

A/D value of room light sensor 

3 byte 

009 

4 

Level of room light sensor (Value: 1 to 5) 

1 byte 

5 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


162 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


9.3.11 QNG (SHUTDOWN INFORMATION OF MTB) 


MTB side's shutdown information is acquired. 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QNG] 

Every time 

Output of status 



Order 

Part 

Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output 

Example 

0 

- 

Received Command name 

3 byte 

QNG 

1 

MTB 

1st latest NG No. 

1 byte 

0 

2 


Subcategory No. for the 1st latest NG. 

1 byte 

0 

3 


MTB hour meter for the 1st latest NG. 

7 byte 

0000000 

4 


Reserved 

3 byte 

fixed on 000 

5 


2nd latest NG No. 

1 byte 

0 

6 


Subcategory No. for the 2nd latest NG. 

1 byte 

0 

7 


MTB hour meter for the 2nd latest NG. 

7 byte 

0000000 

8 


Reserved 

3 byte 

fixed on 000 

9 


3rd latest NG No. 

1 byte 

0 

10 


Subcategory No. for the 3rd latest NG. 

1 byte 

0 

11 


MTB hour meter for the 3rd latest NG. 

7 byte 

0000000 

12 


Reserved 

3 byte 

fixed on 000 






29 


8th latest NG No. 

1 byte 

0 

30 


Subcategory No. for the 8th latest NG. 

1 byte 

0 

31 


MTB hour meter for the 8th latest NG. 

7 byte 

0000000 

32 


Reserved 

3 byte 

fixed on 000 

33 

- 

Check Sum 

2 byte 

00 


< SD Information No. > 


Frequency * 

Part 

Part 

Remarks (Operation) 

5 


Shutdown signal from audio amp. / short-circuit of 
speaker terminal 

Shutdown after 30 seconds warning 

6 


Failure of communication with Module microcomputer 

Immediately Shutdown 

7 


3-wire serial communication of Main microcomputer 

Go to No. 7 Subcategory Information 

8 


IIC communication failure of MTB side 

Go to No. 8 Subcategory Information 

9 

MTB 

part 

Communication failure of Main microcomputer 

Immediately Shutdown 

10(A) 

Failure of FAN 

Go to No. 10 Subcategory Information 

11(B) 


Abnormally in high temperature 

Shutdown after 30 seconds warning 

12(C) 


Failure of Digital Tuner 

Go to No. 12 Subcategory Information 

13(D) 


Failure of Power Supply at MTB side 

Go to No. 13 Subcategory Information 

14(E) 


Startup failure of Flome Media Gallery 

- 

15(F) 


Failure of Main EEPROM 

Immediately Shutdown 


*: Indicates the frequency of Blue LED flashing when the shutdown is occurred. 


PDP-501 OFD 


163 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


< No. 7 Subcategory Information on "Failure in 3-wire 
serial communication of Main microcomputer" > 


Value 

Shutdown Factor 

Remarks (Operation) 

1 

Communication error of IF 
microcomputer 

Shutdown 

2 

Communication error of 
sequence processor 

Shutdown 


< No. 8 Subcategory Information on "Failure in 
b IIC communication of MTB side" > 


Value 

Shutdown Factor 

Remarks (Operation) 

1 

Tuner 1 

Shutdown 

2 

MSP/MAP 

Shutdown 

3 

AV Switch 

Shutdown 

4 

RGB Switch 

Shutdown 

5 

VDEC 

Shutdown 

6 

VDEC-SDRAM 

Shutdown 

7 

AD/PLL 

Shutdown 

8 

HDMI 

Shutdown 

A 

Tuner 2 

Shutdown 

B 

US-MSP 

Shutdown 


< No. 10 Subcategory Information on "Abnormally in 
FAN" > 


Value 

Shutdown Factor 

Remarks (Operation) 

1 

FAN 1 

Shutdown 

2 

FAN 2 (FHD only) 

Shutdown 


< No. 12 Subcategory Information on "Failure in 
Digital Tuner" > 


Value 

Shutdown Factor 

Remarks (Operation) 

1 

DTV starting failure 

Turn off the screen, 

2 

DTV communication error 

then reset the 
device. 

4 

Abnormmaly in BCM7038 

7 

Tuner 1 or 2 


8 

Card l/F 1C 


9 

VBI Slicer 


C 

EEPROM 


E 

TV Guide 


G 

Home Gallery 


H 

Middleware 


1 

Application 



< No. 13 Subcategory Information on "Failure in 
Power supply at MTB side" > 


Value 

Shutdown Factor 

Remarks (Operation) 

1 

RST 2 

Shutdown 

2 

RST 4 

Shutdown 


□ 


E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


164 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


9.3.12 QSI (INPUT SIGNAL DATA) 

The command QSI is for acquiring all data on input video signals. 


A 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[QSI] 

All operations 

To acquire all data on input video signals 

Return data: 3 (ECO) + 66 (DATA) + 2 (CS) = 71 Byte 


Data Arrangement 

Data 

Length 

Output 

Example 

ECO 

3 Byte 

QSI (fixed) 

1 

Type of drive sequence 

3 Byte 

60V 

2 

Standard/nonstandard 

1 Byte 

S 

3 

Type of ABL/WB tables 

2 Byte 

T1 

4 

Total value of PCN 

4 Byte 

0256 

5 

Total value of PRH 

4 Byte 

0256 

6 

Total value of PGH 

4 Byte 

0256 

7 

Total value of PBH 

4 Byte 

0256 

8 

Total value of PBR 

4 Byte 

0512 

9 

Total value of PRL 

4 Byte 

0512 

10 

Total value of PGL 

4 Byte 

0512 

11 

Total value of PBL 

4 Byte 

0512 

12 

Total value of ABL 

3 Byte 

128 

13 

V frequency distinction 

4 Byte 

6002 

14 

Reserved 

1 Byte 

* 

15 

Reserved 

4 Byte 

**** 

16 

APL acquiring data 

4 Byte 

1023 

17 

Number of SUS pulses 

4 Byte 

0457 

18 

Result of detection of still picture 

1 Byte 

1 

19 

Result of detection of cracking in the panel 

1 Byte 

1 

20 

Result of detection for scanning protection 

1 Byte 

1 

21 

Result of detection for external protection 

1 Byte 

1 

22 

Transition of protection operation 

1 Byte 

1 

23 

Reserved 

4 Byte 

**** 

24 

CS 

2 Byte 

27 


1 : Type of Drive 

sequence 

50V 

Video 50 Hz 

60V 

Video 60 Hz 

72V 

Video 72 Hz 

75V 

Video 75 Hz 

60P 

PC 60 Hz 

70P 

PC 70 Hz 


2: Standard/ 
nonstandard 

s 

Standard 

N 

Nonstandard 


3: Type of ABL/WB 
tables 


Tn 


n: 1 to 4 


13: V frequency 
distinction 

Reading value *100 


16: APL acquiring 
data 

Output with 10 bit Oto 1023 


17: Number of SUS 
pulses 

0174 to 2752 


18 to 21: Each protection function 

0 

Setting: OFF 

1 

Setting: ON (during wait) 

2 

Setting: ON (during operation) 


22: Transition of protection 
operations 

0 

Upper limit state for brightness 

1 

Brightness being reduced 

2 

Lower limit state for brightness 

3 

Brightness being increased 


C 


D 


9.3.13 DRV (PANEL DRIVE-POWER ON / OFF) 


Drive ON/OFF: ON/OFF control of panel drive-power system 


Command 

Format 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Function 

Remarks 

[DRV+S00] 

Every time 

DRIVE OFF 


[DRV+S01] 

Every time 

DRIVE ON (default) 


Once the DRIVE OFF command is accepted, DRIVE OFF cannot be canceled by pressing the DRIVE OFF key again or by 
turning the unit off then back on with the STANDBY OFF/ON key. 

To cancel DRIVE OFF, restart the unit by unplugging then again plugging in the power cord. 


PDP-501 0FD 


165 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


9.3.14 FAY / FAN (ADJ. COMMANDS PERMISSION / PROHIBITION) 

The commands FAY/FAN are for prohibiting/permitting panel/MTB-adjustment commands. 


Command 

Format 

Operation 

Remarks 

Effective Operation 
Modes 

Control 

[FAY] 

Normal operation mode 
while the power is on 

Adjustment command is valid. 

For details, refer to the section “6.1.3 FUNCTIONS WFIEN 
ENTERING THE SERVICE FACTORY MODE”. 

[FAN] 

During FAY 

Adjustment command is invalid. 



B 


' 9.3.15 FAJ/UAJ/CBU/BCP (BACKUP FUNCTION FOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE) 

When the DIGITAL Assy is to be replaced, adjustment values can be copied from the backup EEPROM to the EEPROM 
of the Assy for service. 


Command 

Format 

Operation 

Remarks 

Effective 
Operation Modes 

Control 

[FAJ] 

During FAY 

To make the flag setting that indicating that adjustment of the panel 
unit has been completed 

This takes at least 350 mS. 

[UAJ] 

To make the flag setting that indicating that adjustment of the main 
unit has not been completed 


[CBU] 

To make the flag setting that indicating that backup data have not 
been copied 

The backup ROM is 
initialized. 

[BCP] 

To copy Digital backup data to EEPROM 



E 


F 


PDP-5010FD 


166 


i 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


167 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


10. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST 

NOTES: • Parts marked by "NSP" are generally unavailable because they are not in our Master Spare Parts List. 

• The A mark found on some component parts indicates the importance of the safety factor of the part. 

A Therefore, when replacing, be sure to use parts of identical designation. 

• Screws adjacent to ▼ mark on product are used for disassembly. 

• For the applying amount of lubricants or glue, follow the instructions in this manual. 

(In the case of no amount instructions, apply as you think it appropriate .) 

10.1 PACKING SECTION 



168 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


(1) PACKING SECTION PARTS LIST 


Mark No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 

A 

1 

Power Cord (2 m) 

ADG1215 


2 

Remote Control Unit 

AXD1550 


3 

Battery Cover 

AZN2680 

NSP 

4 

Alkaline Dry Cell Battery (LR6, AA) VEM1023 


5 

Binder Assy 

AEC1908 


6 

Cleaning Cloth 

AED1285 


7 

Operating Instructions 

See Contrast table (2) 



(English, French, Spanish) 



8 

Caution Card 

See Contrast table (2) 


9 

Cleaning Caution (U) 

See Contrast table (2) 


10 

Accessory Caution 

See Contrast table (2) 

NSP 

11 

Warranty Card 

See Contrast table (2) 

NSP 

12 

Card (Register) 

See Contrast table (2) 


13 

Polyethylene Bag 

See Contrast table (2) 


14 

Power Button Caution 

See Contrast table (2) 


7 ™ 8 


Mark No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 

15 

After Image Caution 

See Contrast table (2) 

16 

Pad (508F-REG B-L) 

AHA2632 

17 

Pad (508F-REG B-R) 

AHA2633 

18 

Pad (508F-REG T-L) 

AHA2634 

19 

Pad (508F-REG T-R) 

AHA2635 

20 

Pad (508F-REG ACC) 

AHA2675 

21 

Under Carton 

See Contrast table (2) 

22 

Upper Carton (501 OFD) 

See Contrast table (2) 

23 

Packing Sheet L 

See Contrast table (2) 

24 

Band Assy 

AXY1192 

25 

Speaket System 

SMW1985 

26 

HDMI Caution 

See Contrast table (2) 

27 



28 

Parental Caution 

See Contrast table (2) 


A 


(2) CONTRAST TABLE 

PDP-501 OFD/KUCXC and KUC are constructed the same except for the following: 


Mark 

No. 

Symbol and Description 

PDP-501 OFD 
/KUCXC 

PDP-5010FD 

/KUC 


7 

Operating Instructions (English, French, Spanish) 

ARE1472 

ARE1487 


8 

Caution Card 

ARM1239 

ARM1232 


9 

Cleaning Caution (U) 

ARM1303 

ARM1283 


10 

Accessory Caution 

ARM1304 

ARM1362 

NSP 

11 

Warranty Card 

ARY1196 

ARY1138 

NSP 

12 

Card (Register) 

ARY 1156 

VRY1132 


13 

Polyethylene Bag 

AHG1394 

Not used 

NSP 

13 

Vinyl Bag 

Not used 

AHG1340 


14 

Power Button Caution 

ARM1360 

ARM1363 


15 

After Image Caution 

ARM1351 

ARM1361 


21 

Under Carton (508) 

AHD3588 

Not used 


21 

Under Carton (501 OFD) 

Not used 

AHD3571 


22 

Upper Carton (501 OFD) 

AHD3624 

AHD3623 


23 

Packing Sheet L 

AHG1389 

Not used 


23 

Packing Sheet 

Not used 

AHG1405 


26 

HDMI Caution 

ARM1373 

ARM1374 


28 

Parental Caution 

ARM1371 

ARM1372 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


169 


5 


6 


7 


8 





10.2 REAR SECTION 




5 


6 


7 


8 


(1) REAR SECTION PARTS LIST 


Mark No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 


1 

SIDE IO Assy 

AWW1274 


2 

SIDE KEY Assy 

AW W 1275 


3 

USB Cable (J301) 

ADF1034 


4 

Side Input Panel (8U) 

ANC2457 


5 

Function Button Base 

See Contrast table (2) 


6 

Side Input Shield 

See Contrast table (2) 


7 

Function Button Shield 

See Contrast table (2) 


8 

Coil Spring 

ABH1125 


9 

Spacer 

AEC1288 


10 

PCB Spacer 

AEC1570 


11 

Reuse Wire Saddle 

AEC1945 


12 

Locking Card Spacer 

AEC2019 


13 

Reuse Wire Saddle 

AEC2118 


14 

USB Spacer A 

AED1317 


15 

Inner Grip Assy 

See Contrast table (2) 

A 

16 

Gasket (J-TYPE) 

ANK1956 

NSP 

17 

Name Label 

See Contrast table (2) 

NSP 

18 

Serial Seal 

See Contrast table (2) 


19 

Caution Label 

See Contrast table (2) 


20 

Label A (U) 

AAX3478 


Mark No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 

21 

Label C (U) 

AAX3501 

22 

Label B50 (U) 

AAX3540 

23 

Terminal Panel B (50U) 

ANC2452 

24 

Power Button Case (508F) 

AAK2908 

25 

Function Button Panel 

AMB2906 

26 

Side Input Cover 

AMB2911 

27 

Function Button 

AAC1562 

28 

Power Button (508F) 

AAD4152 

29 

Function Button Sheet (8U) 

AAK2919 

30 

Input Cover Label 8U 

AAX3509 

31 

Rear Case (508F) 

ANE1662 

32 

Cushion 

AEB1489 

33 



34 

Screw (3 x 40P) 

ABA1332 

35 

Screw 

ABA1341 

36 

Screw 

AMZ30P060FTB 

37 

Screw 

AMZ30P080FTC 

38 

Screw 

APZ30P080FTB 

39 

Screw 

BPZ30P080FTB 

40 

Screw 

TBZ40P080FTB 

41 

Screw 

BBZ30P060FTB 

42 

Screw 

BPZ30P100FTB 


A 


B 


C 


(2) CONTRAST TABLE 

PDP-501 OFD/KUCXC and KUC are constructed the same except for the following: 


Mark 

No. 

Symbol and Description 

PDP-501 OFD 
/KUCXC 

PDP-5010FD 

/KUC 


5 

Function Button Base 

ANG3066 

ANG2923 


6 

Side Input Shield 

ANK1938 

ANK1834 


7 

Function Button Shield 

ANK1939 

ANK1835 


15 

Inner Grip Assy 

AMR3693 

AMR3434 

NSP 

17 

Name Label (508REG) 

AAL2934 

Not used 

NSP 

17 

Name Label (508REG-J) 

Not used 

AAL2997 

NSP 

18 

Serial Seal 

AAX3182 

Not used 


18 

Serial Sheet 

Not used 

AAX3143 


19 

Caution Label U 

AAX3534 

Not used 


19 

Caution Label E 

Not used 

AAX3533 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


171 


5 


6 


7 


8 





10.3 FRONT SECTION 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


172 


PDP-501 OFD 





■ 

5 ■ 

6 

FRONT SECTION PARTS LIST 


Mark No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 

1 

FHD IR Assy 

AWW1289 

2 

50FHD LED Assy 

AWW1291 

3 

FHD RLS Assy 

AWW1292 

4 

6P/6P/3P Housing Wire (J117) 

ADX3562 

5 

Blind Cushion (508F) 

AEB1479 

6 

Nylon Rivet 

AEC1671 

7 

Rivet 

AEC1877 

8 

1 ..Front Case Assy (508FU) 

AMB3001 

NSP 9 

2. .Panel Cushion H (50) 

AED1257 

NSP 10 

2. .Panel Cushion V (50) 

AED1258 


11 


12 

FC Gate Sheet 

AMR3746 

13 

Screw 

ABZ30P0E 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


173 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


10.4 CHASSIS SECTION (1/2) 




5 


6 


7 


8 


(1) CHASSIS SECTION (1/2) PARTS LIST 


Mark No. 

Description 

Part No. 

Mark No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 


i 

FHD POWER SW Assy 

AWW1293 

16 

Sub Frame Plate 

ANG3046 


2 

Ferrite Core (LI) 

ATX 1044 

17 

Floating Rubber 80 

AEB1427 


3 

Housing Wire (J103) 

ADX3552 

18 

Ferrite Core Holder 

AEC1818 

A 

4 

Fan Motor 80 x 25L 

AXM1058 

19 

Reuse Wire Saddle 

AEC1945 

A 

5 

DC Fan Motor 80 x 25L 

AXM1064 

20 

Ferrite Clamp 

AEC1986 


6 

Front Chassis VL (508F) 

AMA1027 

21 

Reuse Wire Saddle 

AEC2118 


7 

Front Chassis VR (508F) 

AMA1028 

22 

Fan Holder 

AMR3704 


8 

Sub Frame L Assy 507 

See Contrast table (2) 

23 

Gasket ADH-FCH 

ANK1850 


9 

Sub Frame R Assy 507 

See Contrast table (2) 

24 




10 

Front Chassis HT (508F) Assy 

ANA2092 

25 




11 

Front Chassis HB Assy (50) 

ANA2094 

26 

Screw 

See Contrast table 


12 

Panel Holder VI (50) 

ANG2770 

27 

Screw 

ABZ30P080FTC 


13 

Panel Holder V2 (50) 

ANG2771 

28 

Screw 

AMZ30P060FTB 


14 

Fan Holder 

ANG2833 

29 

Screw 

APZ30P080FTB 


15 

Multi Base Holder 

ANG2937 

30 

Screw 

PPZ50P100FTB 





31 

Screw 

TBZ40P080FTB 





32 

Screw 

ABA1364 


(2) CONTRAST TABLE 

PDP-501 OFD/KUCXC and KUC are constructed the same except for the following: 


Mark 

No. 

Symbol and Description 

PDP-501 OFD 
/KUCXC 

PDP-5010FD 

/KUC 


8 

Sub Frame L Assy 507 

ANA2080 

ANA1945 


9 

Sub Frame R Assy 507 

ANA2081 

ANA1946 


26 

Screw 

ABA1313 

ABA1351 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


175 


5 


6 


7 


8 





1 


2 


3 


4 


10.5 CHASSIS SECTION (2/2) 






5 


6 


7 


8 


(1) CHASSIS SECTION (2/2) PARTS LIST 


Mark No. 

Description 

Part No. 

Mark No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 

1 

50FX DRIVE Assy 

AWV2510 

26 

6P&6P Housing Wire (J109) 

ADX3557 

2 

50FY DRIVE Assy 

AWV251 1 

27 

6P&6P Housing Wire (Jill) 

ADX3558 

3 

PANEL SENSOR Assy 

AWW1309 

28 

6P&6P Housing Wire (J 1 1 2) 

ADX3559 

4 

50F DIGITAL Assy 

AWW1316 

29 

3P&3P&3P Housing Wire (J123)ADX3565 

5 

FHD FAN CONNECT Assy 

AWW1290 

30 

Conductive Plate Y 

ANG3050 

A 6 

POWER SUPPLY Unit 

AXY1168 

31 

Nylon Rivet 

AEC1671 

7 

Ferrite Core (FI - F8) 

ATX 1048 

32 

Wire Saddle 

AEC1745 

8 

Three Pieces Connector 40P 

AKM1384 

33 

Flat Clamp 

AEC1879 

9 

Flexible Cable (J201) 

ADD1498 

34 

Ferrite Clamp 

AEC1986 

10 

Flexible Cable (J202) 

ADD1499 

35 

Side Type Mini Clamp 

AEC2003 

11 

Flexible Cable (J203) 

ADD1500 

36 

PCB Spacer (Reuse) 

AEC2087 

12 

Flexible Cable (J204) 

ADD1501 

37 

Reuse Wire Saddle 

AEC2118 

13 

Flexible Cable (J205) 

ADD1502 

38 

Reuse HL 28 

AEC2119 

14 

Flexible Cable (J206) 

ADD1503 

39 

PCB Spacer (Reuse) 

AEC2122 

15 

Flexible Cable (J207) 

ADD1504 

40 

Drive Silicone 

AEH1139 

16 

Flexible Cable (J208) 

ADD1505 

41 

Drive Sheet A 

AMR3697 

17 

Flexible Cable (J209) 

ADD1506 

42 

Drive Sheet B 

AMR3698 

18 

Flexible Cable (J210) 

ADD1507 

43 



19 

Flexible Cable (J21 1) 

ADD1508 

44 



20 

5P Housing Wire (J105) 

ADX3359 

45 

Screw 

See Contrast 

21 

Housing Wire (J126) 

ADX3545 

46 

Screw 

ABA1364 

22 

9P&7P Housing Wire (J101) 

ADX3550 




23 

8P&8P Housing Wire (J102) 

ADX3551 




24 

14P Housing Wire (J104) 

ADX3553 




25 

6P&6P Housing Wire (J108) 

ADX3556 





(2) CONTRAST TABLE 

PDP-501 OFD/KUCXC and KUC are constructed the same except for the following: 


Mark 

No. 

Symbol and Description 

PDP-501 OFD 
/KUCXC 

PDP-5010FD 

/KUC 


45 

Screw 

ABA1313 

ABA1351 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


177 


5 


6 


7 


8 





1 


2 


3 


4 


10.6 PANEL CHASSIS SECTION 






5 


6 


7 


8 


(1) PANEL CHASSIS SECTION PARTS LIST 


Mark No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 

NSP 

1 

Panel Chassis (F) Assy 

AWU1234 

NSP 

2 

50F ADDRESS LAssy 

AWW1310 

NSP 

3 

50F ADDRESS S Assy 

AWW1311 

NSP 

4 

50F SCAN A Assy 

AWW1312 

NSP 

5 

50F SCAN B Assy 

AWW1313 

NSP 

6 

50F SCAN C Assy 

AWW1314 

NSP 

7 

50F SCAN D Assy 

AWW1315 

NSP 

8 

Plasma Panel (50F) Assy 

AWU1235 


9 

PCB Spacer (Reuse) 

AEC2087 


10 

PCB Spacer (Reuse) 

AEC2122 


11 

Heat Radiation Sheet 

AEH1134 


12 

Conductive Plate Holder 

AMR3446 


13 

Address Plate (50F) A 

ANG3048 


14 

Address Plate (50F) B 

ANG3071 


15 

Conductive Plate X (F) 

ANG2906 


16 

Screw 

ABA1351 


17 

Screw 

ABA1364 


18 

Three Pieces Connector 40P 

AKM1384 


19 

Gasket AD 

ANK1948 


20 

Screw 

See Contrast table (2) 


(2) CONTRAST TABLE I 

PDP-501 OFD/KUCXC and KUC are constructed the same except for the following: 


Mark 

No. 

Symbol and Description 

PDP-501 OFD 
/KUCXC 

PDP-5010FD 

/KUC 


20 

Screw 

ABA1313 

ABA1351 


E 


F 


179 


5 


6 


PDP-501 OFD 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


10.7 MULTI BASE SECTION 




5 


6 


7 


8 


MULTI BASE SECTION PARTS LIST 


No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 

1 

MAIN Assy 

AWV2457 

2 

TANSHI Assy 

AW W 1334 

3 

POD Assy 

AWW1295 

4 

Power Switch (SI : TRAP) 

ASG1089 

5 

AC Inlet (CN1) 

AKP1322 

6 

Flexible Cable (J212) 

ADD1441 

7 

Flexible Cable (J213) 

ADD1491 

8 

Flexible Cable (J214, J215) 

ADD1519 

9 

12P&15P Housing Wire (J106) 

ADX3554 

10 

5P Housing Wire (J107) 

ADX3555 

11 

1 1/6/4P Housing Wire (J1 14) 

ADX3560 

12 

13 

1 1 P Housing Wire (J 1 1 8) 

ADX3563 

14 

8P/4P Housing Wire (J1 1 9) 

ADX3531 

15 

7P Housing Wire (J125) 

ADX3566 

16 

3P Housing Wire (J127) 

ADX3546 

17 

18 

Locking Card Spacer 

AEC1429 

19 

Wire Saddle 

AEC1745 

20 

Reuse Wire Saddle 

AEC1945 

21 

Silicone Sheet Audio 

AEH1143 

22 

POD Cover 

AMR3542 

23 

Multi Base Assy (U) 

ANA2102 

24 

Terminal Panel A (U) 

ANC2440 

25 

POD Stay A 

ANG2933 

26 

27 

Gasket UD 

ANK1883 

28 

Hex. Head Screw 

BBA1051 

29 

Washer Faced Nut 

BBN1005 

30 

Screw 

BMZ30P060FTB 

31 

Screw 

PMB30P080FNI 

32 

6P Housing Wire (J1 15) 

ADX3561 

33 

4P Housing Wire (J122) 

ADX3564 


E 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


181 


5 


6 


7 


8 




1 


2 


3 


4 


10.8 PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F (AWU1 272) 




5 


6 


7 


8 


• Packing Section 



c 


PDP SERVICE ASSY 508F PARTS LIST 


Mark No. 

Description 

Part No. 

Mark No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 

NSP 1 

Panel Chassis (F) Assy 

AWU1234 

26 

Screw 

APZ30P080FTB 

2 

Front Chassis VL (508F) 

AMA1027 

27 

Screw 

TBZ40P080FTB 

3 

Front Chassis VR (508F) 

AMA1028 

28 



4 

Sub Frame L Assy 507 

ANA1945 

29 



5 

Sub Frame R Assy 507 

ANA1946 

30 



6 

Front Chassis HT (508F) Assy 

ANA2092 

31 

Caution Label 

AAX3031 

7 

Front Chassis HB Assy (50) 

ANA2094 

32 

Vinyl Bag S 

AHG1338 

8 

Conductive Plate X (F) 

ANG2906 

33 



9 

Sub Frame Plate 

ANG3046 

34 

Service Pad 

AEC2105 

10 

Address Plate (50F) A 

ANG3048 

35 

Pad (508F T-L) 

AHA2683 

11 

Address Plate (50F) B 

ANG3071 

36 

Pad (508F T-R) 

AHA2684 

12 

Rivet 

AEC1877 

37 

Pad (508F B-L) 

AHA2685 

13 

Ferrite Clamp 

AEC1986 

38 

Pad (508F B-R) 

AHA2686 

14 

Side Type Mini Clamp 

AEC2003 

39 

Linder Carton (508F) 

AHD3622 

15 

PCB Spacer (Reuse) 

AEC2122 

40 

Upper Carton (508F service) 

AHD3637 

16 

Gasket ADH-FCH 

ANK1850 

41 

Protect Sheet 

AHG1331 

17 

Gasket AD 

ANK1948 




NSP 18 

Front Case (508F) 

AMB3000 




19 

Rear Case (508F) 

AN El 662 




NSP 20 

Drive Voltage Label 

ARW1097 




21 

Screw (3 x 40P) 

ABA1332 




22 

Screw 

ABA1351 




23 

Screw 

ABA1364 




24 

Screw 

ABZ30P080FTC 




25 

Screw 

AMZ30P060FTB 





PDP-501 OFD 


183 


5 


6 


7 


8 





1 


2 


3 


4 


10.9 TABLE TOP STAND 



D 


1 TABLE TOP STAND PARTS LIST 


Mark No. 

Description 

Part No. 

1 

Base Cover Assy 

AXY1176 

2 

Stand Pipe L Assy 

AXY1182 

3 

Stand Pipe R Assy 

AXY1183 

4 

Screw 

ABA1357 

5 

Screw (M8 x 23) 

ABA1371 

6 

Screw (M8 x 40) 

ABA1373 


PDP-5010FD 


184 


1 


2 


3 


4 



5 


6 


7 


8 


10.10 SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING) 



SPEAKER SYSTEM (PACKING) PARTS LIST 


Mark No. 

Description 

Part No. 

Mark No. 

Description 

Part No. 

NSP 1 

1.. Accessory Set 

SME3775 

17 



2 

2. .Speaker Wire 

SDS1202 

18 

Protector (Side) 

SHA2577 

3 

2. .Polyethylene Bag SI 

SHL1439 

19 

Protector (C-T) 

SHA2578 

NSP 4 

2. .Screw Set 

SME3696 

20 

Protector (C-M) 

SHA2579 

5 

3. .Screw 

BMZ50P100FTB 

21 

Protector (C-B) 

SHA2580 

6 

3.. Polyethylene Bag SO 

SHL1438 







22 

Protection Sheet S3 

SHC1846 

7 

1.. Bracket Assy (S) 

SXG1127 

23 

Protection Sheet SI 

SHC1847 

8 

2. .Gasket 

SED1136 

24 

Packing Case 

SHG2780 

9 

2. .Gasket 

SED1138 

25 

Packing Bag S2 

SHL1450 

10 

2. .Gasket 

SED1166 

26 

Polyethylen Bag SO 

SHL1451 

NSP 11 

2.. Bracket LR 

SNA1481 







NSP 27 

CS Assy 

SMW1987 

12 

1.. Bracket Assy (C) 

SXG1128 

NSP 28 

Serial Label 

SRW1112 

13 

2. .Gasket 

SED1140 




14 

2. .Gasket 

SED1141 




15 

2. .Gasket 

SED1167 




NSP 16 

2.. Bracket C 

SNA1482 





PDP-501 OFD 


185 


7 


8 



1 


2 


3 


4 


10.11 CS ASSY 






■ 5 ■ 6 

CS ASSY PARTS LIST 


Mark No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 


1 

Speaker 

HI 32DC65-51 D 


2 

Speaker 

FK26AP32-55H 

NSP 

3 

Baffle 

SNK2980 

NSP 

4 

Cabinet Assy C 

SXG1122 

NSP 

5 

Cabinet Assy L 

SXG1123 

NSP 

6 

Cabinet Assy R 

SXG1124 


7 

Grille 

SMG1886 


8 

1.. Network Assy 

SWN1787 



2. .Capacitor 1 .5 

SCE1034 



2. .Choke Coil 0.68 

STH1266 

NSP 

9 

Gasket 

SEB1299 

NSP 

10 

Gasket 

SEB1300 


11 

Packing 

SEB1302 

NSP 

12 

Blinder 

SEB1304 

NSP 

13 

Gasket 

SEB1315 

NSP 

14 

Gasket 

SEB1316 

NSP 

15 

Gasket 

SEC2074 


16 

Gasket 

SEC2076 

NSP 

17 

Gasket 

SEC2078 


18 

Gasket 

SEC2083 

NSP 

19 

Gasket 

SEC2092 

NSP 

20 

Gasket 

SEC2093 

NSP 

21 

Gasket 

SEC2113 

NSP 

22 

Gasket 

SEC2114 

NSP 

23 

Gasket 

SEC2150 

NSP 

24 

Gasket 

SEC2142 

NSP 

25 

Felt 

SED1127 

NSP 

26 

Felt 

SED1130 


27 

Tape 

SEH1089 


28 

Tape 

SEH1099 


29 

Tape 

SEH1117 


30 

Input Terminal 

SKX1098 

NSP 

31 

MDF Bar 

SLX1165 

NSP 

32 

Paper Tube 26 

SMR1403 

NSP 

33 

Acoustic Absorbent 

SMT1331 

NSP 

34 

Acoustic Absorbent 

SMT1333 

NSP 

35 

Acoustic Absorbent 

SMT1335 

NSP 

36 

Acoustic Absorbent 

SMT1328 

NSP 

37 

Acoustic Absorbent 

SMT1357 

NSP 

38 

Acoustic Absorbent 

SMT1358 

NSP 

39 

Acoustic Absorbent 

SMT1359 

NSP 

40 

Model Label 

SAN3955 

NSP 

41 

Caution Label 

SRR1024 

NSP 

42 

Serial Label 

SRW1111 


43 




7 ™ 8 


Mark No. 

DescriDtion 

Part No. 

44 

Screw 

BPZ30P080FTC 

45 

Screw 

BPZ35P080FTC 

46 

Screw 

BPZ35P120FTB 

47 

Screw 

BPZ35P120FTC 

48 

Screw 

BPZ35P140FTB 

49 

Screw 

BPZ40P350FTC 


B 


C 


D 


F 


PDP-501 OFD 


187 


7 


8